2024-09-10; City Council; 08; Monroe Street Pool Renovation and Replacement Project Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Appropriation of Construction Funding, and Authorization to Advertise — Carlsbad City Council, September 10, 2024 (part 7 of 11)

B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, keep dry and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Electricity Meters - Basis of Design: Veris Industries as indicated under product description below;
B. Electricity Meters - Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Veris Industries; E5x Series Enhanced Power and Energy Meter:

2. Same as manufacturer of electrical distribution equipment used for this project. a. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
b. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
c. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. d. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work, including any design fees.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Electricity Metering 26 27 13 - 3
E. Source Limitations: Furnish electricity meters produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 EQUIPMENT FOR OWNER ELECTRICITY METERING
A. Provide microprocessor-based digital electricity metering systems including all instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements specified.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Provide electricity metering systems and associated components compatible with the equipment and associated circuits to be metered.

D. Service Conditions: Provide electricity meters suitable for operation under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Enclosures:

1. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide required cabinets and enclosures in accordance with Section 26 05 33.16.

2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.

3. Provide lockable door(s) for outdoor locations.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

F. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13, where applicable.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Compatible with connected meters; replace meters damaged by connection of incompatible current transformers. Provide shorting terminal blocks for connection of secondaries where applicable.

4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

G. Interface with Other Work:

1. Interface with electrical power monitoring system.

2. Interface with building automation system.

2.03 SINGLE CIRCUIT ELECTRICITY METERS
A. Single Circuit Electricity Meter - Basis of Design: Veris Industries; E5x Series Enhanced Power and Energy Meter with LCD screen interface; 5-year warranty; utilizes voltage mode CTs that do not require terminal shorting blocks; compatible with solid-core, split-core, and rope CTs.

1. Accuracy:
a. Real/Active Power/Energy: Revenue grade; plus/minus 0.2 percent, complying with ANSI C12.20 accuracy and IEC 62053-22, Class 0.2S.
b. Reactive Power/Energy: Plus/minus 2.0 percent, complying with IEC 62053-23, Class 2.

2. Measured Parameters:
a. Real/active energy (kWh); per phase and total of all phases. b. Reactive energy (kVARh) and apparent energy (kVAh); total of all phases. c. Net present demand over a user-specified interval (block or sliding window); real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA). d. Maximum (peak) demand intervals; real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA).
e. Real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA); per phase and total of all phases.
f. Models Available with Bi-directional Energy Measurements:
1) Real/active energy (kWh) and apparent energy (kVAh); imported (from the grid), exported (to the grid), and signed net total.
2) Reactive energy (kVARh); imported (from the grid) and exported (to the grid), per quadrant as defined by IEEE 1459.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Electricity Metering 26 27 13 - 4
3) Maximum demand; real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA); imported (from the grid) and exported (to the grid). g. Current; per phase and average of all phases.
h. Voltage; line-to-line and line-to-neutral; per phase and average of all phases. i. Power factor; per phase and average of all phases.
j. Frequency.

3. Models Available with Data Logging: Logs and retains in non-volatile memory up to 5760 measurement records at time intervals determined by Demand Interval duration setting (up to 60 days of readings at 15 minute intervals).

4. Alarm capability, with configurable setpoints.
a. Low power factor.
b. Current over range.
c. Voltage over range.
d. Frequency out of range.
e. Models available with pulse output overrun.

5. Models Available with Pulse Contact Accumulator Input(s): Up to two; user-configurable to support measurement of other related energy values (gas, water, steam, etc.) using pulse-output transducers.

6. Outputs:
a. Models Available with Phase Loss Alarm Output: One; user-configurable phase loss threshold.
b. Models Available with Pulse Output(s): Up to two.

7. Communications: Compatible with connected systems. Provide all accessories necessary for proper interface.
a. Models available with Serial Communications:
1) RS-485, 2-wire; support for Modbus RTU protocol.
2) RS-485, 2-wire; support for BACnet MS/TP protocol.
3) LON FT, 2-wire; support for LonTalk protocol.

2.04 MULTI-CIRCUIT ELECTRICITY METERS
A. Multi-Circuit Electricity Meter - Basis of Design: Veris Industries; E3x Series Panelboard Monitoring System; 5-year warranty; utilizes voltage mode CTs that do not require shorting terminal blocks.

1. Metering Capacity: As indicated or as required for circuits to be monitored (configurations available for monitoring up to 84 branch circuits, two 3-phase main devices, and two neutrals with one meter).

2. Accuracy:
a. Real/Active Power/Energy (for models that measure this parameter): Revenue grade; plus/minus 1.0 percent (including branch CTs); complying with ANSI C12.1 and IEC 62053-21, Class 1.
b. Voltage (for models that measure this parameter): Plus/minus 0.5 percent. c. Current: Plus/minus 0.5 percent.

3. Measured Parameters at Main Device:
a. Current; per phase and average of all phases.
b. Maximum current; per phase and maximum average of all phases. c. Current demand; per phase and average of all phases. d. Maximum current demand; per phase and maximum average of all phases. e. Models available with measurements for:
1) Current phase angle.
2) Real/active energy (kWh); per phase and total of all phases. 3) Snapshot of total energy as of the completion of the most recent demand interval; per phase and total of all phases.
4) Real/active power (kW); per phase and total of all phases; available signed to indicate whether energy is being imported or exported.
5) Apparent power (kVA); per phase and total of all phases.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Electricity Metering 26 27 13 - 5
6) Power factor; per phase and total, based on three-phase breaker rotation, signed, to indicate leading or lagging current.
7) Voltage, line-to-line and line-to neutral; per phase and average of all phases. 8) Voltage phase angle.
9) Frequency; phase A.

4. Measured Parameters at Branch Circuits:
a. Current; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits. b. Maximum current; per branch and maximum average of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
c. Current demand; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
d. Maximum current demand; per branch and maximum average of all phases for multi- phase logical circuits.
e. Models available with measurements for:
1) Current phase angle.
2) Real/active power (kW); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits; available signed to indicate whether energy is being imported or exported.
3) Real/active power (kW) demand; per branch and total of all phases for multi- phase logical circuits.
4) Real/active power (kW) demand maximum; per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
5) Real/active energy (kWh); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
6) Snapshot of total energy as of the completion of the most recent demand interval; per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits. 7) Apparent power (kVA); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
8) Power factor; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits, signed to indicate leading or lagging current.

5. Alarm capability, with configurable setpoints.
a. Current over/under range.
b. Models available with voltage over/under range.

6. Communications: Compatible with connected systems. Provide all accessories necessary for proper interface.
a. Models Available with Serial Communications:
1) RS-485, 2-wire or 4-wire; support for Modbus RTU protocol. 2) RS-485, 2-wire; support for Modbus RTU and BACnet MS/TP protocols. b. Models Available with Ethernet Communications:
1) Without RJ-45 10/100 Mbit; requires Modbus TCP Gateway; support for Modbus TCP protocol.
2) With RJ-45 10/100 Mbit; support for Modbus TCP, BACnet IP, and SNMP protocols.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of metering systems and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive meters.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Electricity Metering 26 27 13 - 6
D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

E. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 as required.

F. Identify meters and associated wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.

D. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required.

E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective metering system components.

F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Program system parameters according to requirements of Owner.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of system.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.

3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.

4. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed system components from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 27 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.

B. Wall dimmers.

C. Fan speed controllers.

D. Receptacles.

E. Wall plates.

F. Floor box service fittings.

G. Poke-through assemblies.

H. Access floor boxes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 69 00 - Access Flooring.

B. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Manufactured wiring systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-wired connectors.

C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 33.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems: Surface raceway systems, including multioutlet assemblies.

F. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.

G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

H. Section 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections: Cords and plugs for equipment.

I. Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers.

J. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Voice and data jacks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2014h, with Amendments (2017).

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification); 2014g, with Amendment (2017).

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections.

6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

2. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection rating (VPR) for each protection mode, and diagnostics information.

C. Samples: One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified.

D. Certificates for Surge Protection Receptacles: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for compliance with UL 1449.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets.

2. GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.

3. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws: Two for each type of screw.

3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type.

4. Extra Surge Protection Receptacles: Two of each type.

5. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish.

6. Extra Flush Floor Service Fittings: Two of each type.

7. Extra Poke-Through Core Hole Closure Plugs: Two for each core size.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for receptacles installed in dwelling units.

E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.

G. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

H. Provide isolated ground receptacles for receptacles serving computers and electronic cash registers.

I. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

J. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.

K. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.

C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.

D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.

E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.

F. Wiring Devices Installed ______: White with white nylon wall plate.

G. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange.

H. Surge Protection Receptacles: Blue.

I. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate.

J. Above-Floor Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with satin aluminum housing.

K. Flush Floor Box Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and ring/flange.

L. Flush Poke-Through Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and aluminum flange.

M. Access Floor Boxes: Gray wiring devices with gray steel cover with insert to match floor covering.

2.03 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20and where applicable FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

D. Lighted Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load off; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

E. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4
F. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

G. Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with toggle type three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.

H. Locking Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.

2.04 WALL DIMMERS
A. Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings.

B. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch.

2.05 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com/#sle.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com/#sle.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

6. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated.

B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

3. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green dot hospital grade mark on device face.

C. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Automatically Controlled Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; controlled receptacle marking on device face per NFPA 70; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

3. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap; isolated ground triangle mark on device face; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

4. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

5. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

6. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

7. Illuminated Convenience Receptacles: Hospital grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; illuminated face or indicator light to indicate power is being supplied to receptacle; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFCI Receptacles:

1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

4. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.

5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated.

B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.

2. Size: Standard.

3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

4. Provide screwless wallplates with concealed mounting hardware where indicated.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.

D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.

E. Brass Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation.

F. Aluminum Wall Plates: Smooth satin finish, clear anodized, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation.

G. Chrome Wall Plates: Smooth finish, chrome plated steel.

H. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.

I. Premarked Wall Plates: Factory labeled as indicated; hot stamped for nylon wall plates and engraved for metal wall plates.

J. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.

K. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

2.07 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 6
B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 with components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

C. Above-Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Pedestal Convenience Receptacles:
a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2. Single Service Pedestal Communications Outlets:
a. Configuration: One 1 inch bushed opening.
b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00.

3. Single Service Pedestal Furniture Feed:
a. Configuration: One 3/4 inch knockout.

4. Dual Service Pedestal Combination Outlets:
a. Configuration:
1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.
2) Communications: One 1 inch bushed opening.
3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00. b. Provide barrier to separate line and low voltage compartments.

D. Flush Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Flush Convenience Receptacles:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).

2. Single Service Flush Communications Outlets:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration: __________.
c. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00.

3. Single Service Flush Furniture Feed:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration: One 2-1/8 inch by 3/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).

4. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration:
1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).
2) Communications:
3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00. 4) Voice and Data Jacks: Provided by others.

5. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration:
1) Power: One 2-1/8 inch by 3/4 inch combination threaded opening(s). 2) Communications: One 2-1/8 inch by 1 inch combination threaded opening(s).

6. Accessories:
a. Tile Rings: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers.
b. Carpet Flanges: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers.

7. Products:
a. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2.08 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Assembly comprising floor service fitting, poke-through component, fire stops and smoke barriers, and junction box for conduit termination; fire rating listed to match fire rating of floor and suitable for floor thickness where installed.

C. Above-Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Pedestal Convenience Receptacles:
a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2. Single Service Pedestal Communications Outlets:
a. Configuration: One 1 inch bushed opening.
b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00.

3. Single Service Pedestal Furniture Feed:
a. Configuration: One 3/4 inch knockout.

5. Products:
a. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Flush Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Flush Convenience Receptacles:
a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).

2. Single Service Flush Communications Outlets:
a. Configuration: __________.
b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00.

3. Single Service Flush Furniture Feed:
a. Configuration: One 2 inch by 1-1/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).

4. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:
a. Cover: Hinged door(s).
b. Configuration:
1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s). 2) Communications:
3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00.

5. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed:
a. Configuration:
1) Power: One 3/4 inch threaded opening(s).
2) Communications: Two 1/2 inch threaded opening(s).

6. Accessories:
a. Closure Plugs: Size and fire rating as required to seal unused core hole and maintain fire rating of floor.

2.09 ACCESS FLOOR BOXES
A. Manufacturers - Access Floor Boxes:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Manufacturers - Access Floor Boxes with Pre-wired Connectors for Manufactured Wiring Systems:

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.

2. RELOC Wiring Solutions, a brand of Acuity Brands, Inc: www.relocwiring.com/#sle.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

5. Source Limitations: Provide access floor boxes with pre-wired connectors produced by the same manufacturer as the manufactured wiring system used for this project.

C. Description: Metallic multi-service box suitable for mounting in access floor system specified in Section 09 69 00.

D. Access floor boxes with pre-wired connectors for manufactured wiring systems are permitted only where manufactured wiring systems are permitted as specified in Section 26 05 19.

E. Configuration:

1. Power: Two standard convenience duplex receptacle(s).

2. Communications:

3. Voice and Data Jacks: Provided by others.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with CEC.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.

F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.

H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.

I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section.

1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor.
c. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 9
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

I. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

J. Unless otherwise indicated, GFCI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFCI protection.

K. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

L. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

M. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

N. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

O. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.

P. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

Q. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

R. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

S. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

T. Install poke-through closure plugs in each unused core holes to maintain fire rating of floor.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Inspect each surge protection receptacle to verify surge protection is active.

G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Fuses 26 28 13 - 1
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.

B. Spare fuse cabinet.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

B. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards: Fusible switches.

C. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Fusible switches.

D. Section 26 24 19 - Motor-Control Centers: Fusible switches.

E. Section 26 25 13 - Low-Voltage Busways: Fusible switches.

F. Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.

G. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers: Fusible switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

D. UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. UL 248-8 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 8: Class J Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 248-10 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 10: Class L Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 248-15 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 15: Class T Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses.
a. Fusible Switches for Switchboards: See Section 26 24 13. b. Fusible Switches for Panelboards: See Section 26 24 16. c. Fusible Switches for Motor Control Centers: See Section 26 24 19. d. Fusible Switches for Busway: See Section 26 25 01.
e. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 26 28 16.16. f. Fusible Switches for Enclosed Motor Controllers: See Section 26 29 13.

2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.

1. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Include dimensions.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed.

3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed.

4. Spare Fuse Cabinet Keys: Two.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com/#sle.

C. Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com/#sle.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance:

1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.

2. Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes: Class L, time-delay.

B. Feeders:

1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.

2. Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes: Class L, time-delay.

C. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.

D. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.

E. In-Line Protection for Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Class CC, time-delay.

F. Primary Protection for Control Transformers: Class CC, time-delay.

2.03 FUSES
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system.

C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.

D. Comply with UL 248-1.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated.

F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.

H. Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 248-10.

I. Class CC Fuses: Comply with UL 248-4.

2.04 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves and hinged door with cylinder lock, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey finish unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive spare fuse cabinet.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Fuses 26 28 13 - 3
A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.

B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

C. Install spare fuse cabinet where indicated.

D. Identify spare fuse cabinet in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

END OF SECTION 26 28 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Circuit Breakers 26 28 16.13 - 1
SECTION 26 28 16.13

ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed circuit breakers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this section.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 05 73 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e, with Amendments (2022).

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

D. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by CEC.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.

1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon request.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Circuit Breakers 26 28 16.13 - 2
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed circuit breakers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems.

4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.

5. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers.

H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed circuit breakers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.

B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in enclosures.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Circuit Breakers 26 28 16.13 - 3
C. Seismic Qualification: Provide enclosed circuit breakers and associated components suitable for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 05 48 where required.

Include certification of compliance with submittals.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

E. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location indicated on the drawings.

2. Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 05 73.

3. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permited by motor contribution according to CEC.

4. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by CEC.

F. Enclosed Circuit Breakers Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.

I. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.

J. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.

K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.

L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

M. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.

N. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053.

1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion circuit breakers with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings. c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

O. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination.

2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Interrupting Capacity:

1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
a. 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. b. 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations:

1. Provide compression lugs unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

D. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

1. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.

2. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units.

1. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
a. Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial. b. Long time delay.
c. Short time pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup.
e. Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

2. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

3. Provide communication capability where indicated: Compatible with system indicated.

F. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

G. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:

1. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.

2. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment.

3. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed to limit the let- through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current when operating within its current limiting range.

H. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits serving fluorescent lighting.

I. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all branch circuits serving HID lighting.

J. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

2. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.

3. Undervoltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop in coil voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping.

4. Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped.

PART 3 EXECUTION
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Circuit Breakers 26 28 16.13 - 5

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CEC.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.

F. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.

G. Install flush-mounted enclosed circuit breakers so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered.

H. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

K. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as indicated.

L. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.

M. Identify enclosed circuit breakers in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except Section

4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for circuit breakers used for service entrance and for circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required.

D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by CEC.

1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

F. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16.13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Switches 26 28 16.16 - 1
SECTION 26 28 16.16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed safety switches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

F. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers: Manual motor controllers.

G. Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switches: Automatic and non-automatic switches listed for use as transfer switch equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.

D. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NEC.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed switches and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

3. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Switches 26 28 16.16 - 2
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.

H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. See Section 26 28 13 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.

B. Maintain ambient temperature between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.

B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Seismic Qualification: Provide enclosed safety switches suitable for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 05 48 where required. Include certification of compliance with submittals.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

G. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Minimum Ratings:
a. Switches Protected by Class H Fuses: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. b. General Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, or Class T Fuses: 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
c. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L, or Class T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
d. Double Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, or Class T Fuses: 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

H. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

I. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.

J. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated.

1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation of fuses other than Class R.

K. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

L. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.

M. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.

N. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated.

O. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

P. Heavy Duty Switches:

1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.

2. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide compression lugs where indicated.
c. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks.
a. Provide means for locking handle in the ON position where indicated.

Q. General Duty Switches:

1. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs.
b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

2. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting two padlocks.

R. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

1. Hubs: As required for environment type; sized to accept conduits to be installed.

2. Integral fuse pullers.

3. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated, with auxiliary contact operation before switch blades open and after switch blades close.

4. Viewing Window: Positioned over switch blades for visual confirmation of contact position with door closed.

5. Interlocked Receptacle: Integral pre-wired three phase, three wire, grounded type receptacle interlocked with switch mechanism to prevent insertion or removal of plug with switch in the ON position and to prevent switch from being placed in the ON position without matching plug inserted. Provide receptacle configuration as required to accept plug as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CEC.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Install enclosed switches plumb.

F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

J. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated components.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16.16
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 1
SECTION 26 29 13

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.01 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Provide enclosed controller assemblies consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Description: Enclosed controllers complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

D. Service Conditions:

1. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation under the following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude:
1) Class 1 Km Equipment (devices utilizing power semiconductors, e.g. variable frequency controllers): Less than 3,300 feet.
2) Class 2 Km Equipment (electromagnetic and manual devices): Less than 6,600 feet.
b. Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

2. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Short Circuit Current Rating:

F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

G. Enclosures:

1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.

2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

H. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.

4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

1.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Overload Relays:

1. Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters, selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor service factor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.

2. Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. Trip-free operation.

4. Visible trip indication.

5. Resettable.
a. Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.
b. Do not employ automatic reset with two-wire control.

END OF SECTION 26 29 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Photovoltaic Collectors 26 31 00 - 1
SECTION 26 31 00

PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Photovoltaic system requirements.

B. Photovoltaic modules.

C. Photovoltaic module mounting system.

D. Photovoltaic combiner boxes.

E. Photovoltaic inverters.

F. Monitoring system.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.

F. Section 26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers: Isolation transformers not integral to inverters.

G. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

H. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEC 61215-1 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type Approval - Part 1: Test Requirements; 2021 (Corrigendum).

B. IEC 61215-1-1 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type Approval - Part 1-1: Special Requirements for Testing of Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic (PV) Modules; 2021.

C. IEC 61215-2 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type Approval - Part 2: Test Procedures; 2021.

D. IEEE 1547 - IEEE Standard for Interconnection and Interoperability of Distributed Energy Resources with Associated Electric Power Systems Interfaces; 2018, with Amendment (2020).

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

F. NECA 412 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Photovoltaic (PV) Power Systems; 2012.

G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 1699B - Outline of Investigation for Photovoltaic (PV) DC Arc-Fault Circuit Protection; Current Edition; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1703 - Flat Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 1741 - Inverters, Converters, Controllers and Interconnection System Equipment for Use With Distributed Energy Resources; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment or other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for photovoltaic system components.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Photovoltaic Collectors 26 31 00 - 2
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance of all affected installers. Include adequate instruction on the electrical hazards associated with photovoltaic systems and appropriate safety procedures to be followed.

C. Rebates and Incentives: Prepare and submit documentation as required for Owner to secure funds from available federal, state, and utility company rebate and incentive programs. Notify Owner of any time constraints affecting program qualification.

D. Utility Interconnection:

1. See Section 26 21 00 for Utility Company contact information and additional requirements.

2. Prepare and submit documentation as required for securing utility interconnection agreement between Owner and Utility Company.

3. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review interconnection requirements and details with Utility Company representative.

4. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide utility metering suitable for system requirements.

5. Arrange for inspections and secure permits necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support point dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.

C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of system components, required clearances, attachment locations and details, and proposed size, type, and routing of conduits and cables. Include system interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

D. Design Data:

1. Include structural calculations, certified by structural engineer, for equipment and mounting system.

2. Include electrical calculations for array and associated equipment other than the basis of design products and configuration.

E. Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Certify that work of this section does not void roof warranty.

G. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.

I. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.

J. Manufacturer's detailed startup procedures.

K. Field quality control test reports.

1. Include manufacturer's field reports.

L. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service.

M. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

N. Maintenance contracts.

O. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed circuiting arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings.

P. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Photovoltaic Modules: Two.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with CEC.

B. Comply with Utility Company requirements for interconnection.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience with photovoltaic systems of similar size, type, and complexity.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, keep dry and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Specified warranties indicate minimum requirements. Provide additional warranties or extended warranty periods where required to qualify for rebate and incentive programs.

C. Photovoltaic Modules:

1. Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

2. Provide manufacturer warranty guaranteeing minimum 90 percent of rated power output for 10 years and minimum 80 percent of rated power output for 20 years.

D. Photovoltaic Module Mounting System: Provide minimum 10 year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

E. Photovoltaic Combiner Boxes: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

F. Photovoltaic Inverters: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

G. Charge Controllers: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Photovoltaic Modules - Basis of Design: As indicated on Drawings.

2.02 PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide complete photovoltaic system consisting of photovoltaic modules and associated balance of system components necessary for connection to facility electrical system.

B. System Description:

1. Photovoltaic array is mounted in location indicated on the drawings.

2. Orientation of array is as indicated on the drawings.

3. Photovoltaic DC system is negative grounded.

4. System includes interconnection with utility grid (grid-tied system). a. Utility metering configuration: Net metering.

5. System does not include battery storage system.

6. System does not include engine generator.

7. System includes DC system surge protection.

8. System includes monitoring system.

C. Capacity:

1. Total Nominal Rated Power Output of Array: Equal to or greater than the rated output of the basis of design array.

D. Size:

1. Array: Designed to fit within the area designated on the drawings.

2. Individual Modules: Size is not critical.

1. Only systems with similar appearance to basis of design system will be considered.

2. Arrange array such that modules are aligned with uniform spacing.

3. Make no alterations affecting appearance of building exterior or interior without approval of Architect.

4. Final determination of acceptable appearance is by Architect.

F. Fire Resistance Rating: Provide photovoltaic module and mounting system combination that together with the roof covering form a system listed in accordance with UL 1703 to provide a fire rating equal to or better than the required fire rating of the roof.

G. Provide photovoltaic system and associated components suitable for wind loads, snow loads, seismic loads, and other structural design considerations of the installed location.

H. Provide photovoltaic system and associated components suitable for continuous operation under the service conditions at the installed location.

I. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

J. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

K. DC Arc Fault Circuit Protection: Provide DC photovoltaic arc-fault protection devices listed as complying with UL 1699B as required for compliance with NFPA 70.

L. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

M. Arrange array to minimize shading during peak production periods.

2.03 PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES
A. Acceptable Module Types: Only crystalline silicon modules are acceptable. Thin film modules will not be considered for this project.

B. General Requirements:

1. Photovoltaic Modules: Factory assembled; consisting of photovoltaic cells, frame, junction box, cables for series connection, and bypass diodes for shade tolerance; rated for 600 V DC; complying with IEC 61215-1 and IEC 61215-2 and listed as complying with UL 1703.

2. Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic Modules: Comply with IEC 61215-1-1.

3. Frame: Anodized aluminum.

4. Factory-Installed Junction Box: Weatherproof, with factory-installed terminals and bypass diodes.

5. Factory-Installed Cables: Type USE-2 or listed photovoltaic (PV) wire with polarized locking connectors.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, specified module performance characteristics are rated under Standard Test Conditions (STC).

2.04 BALANCE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Photovoltaic Module Mounting System:

1. Provide complete mounting system compatible with modules to be installed and suitable to properly install them in the location indicated, including all necessary hardware and accessories.

2. Support Structure and Associated Hardware Materials: Use aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel.

3. Roof-Mounted Arrays:
a. Acceptable System Types: Either non-penetrating or penetrating systems complying with specified requirements will be considered for this project. b. Provide system compatible with the roof at the installed location. c. Module Tilt Angle: As required to provide maximum energy production for installed location.
d. Provide minimum clearance of 3 inches between roof and module for air circulation and drainage.

B. Photovoltaic Combiner Boxes:

1. Provide combiner box(es) for termination of strings as indicated or as required for the array configuration installed.

2. Combiner Boxes: Rated for 600 V DC; current ratings suitable for connected strings; equipped with fuseholders; listed as complying with UL 1741.

3. Fuseholders: Touch-safe; suitable to accept fuses indicated.

4. Number of Input Circuits: As indicated or as required for termination of strings, with minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future expansion.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Provide integral load-break rated disconnect.

7. Provide with capability of current monitoring for individual strings.

C. Photovoltaic Inverters:

1. Provide inverter(s) as indicated or as required for connection of the photovoltaic array DC system to the AC system indicated.

2. Inverters: Suitable for the requirements of the connected array; output configuration compatible with connected system; listed as complying with UL 1741; furnished with the following features:
a. Maximum power point tracking (MPPT).
b. LCD display.
c. Integral AC disconnect.
d. Integral DC disconnect.
e. Integral DC ground fault detection and interruption (GFDI). f. Communications Interface: As required for connection to system indicated.

3. Grid-Tied Inverters: Comply with IEEE 1547, including over/under grid voltage and frequency protection, and anti-islanding protection to automatically disconnect upon loss of utility power and to remain disconnected until utility power restoration has been maintained for five minutes.

4. Grounded Photovoltaic DC Systems: Furnish with integral isolation transformer.

Transformerless inverters may be used if a separate isolation transformer is provided.

5. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than five percent.

6. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

D. Surge Protective Devices, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 43 00:

1. Surge Protective Devices for DC System:
a. Rated for 600 V DC.
b. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1449, Type 1. c. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 50 kA per mode. d. UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (I-n): 20 kA.

E. Monitoring System:

1. Provide a system to monitor photovoltaic system performance including all sensors, dataloggers, connections, software, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete operating system.

2. System communications interfaces to be wired or wireless, with compatible interconnected components.
a. Provide suitable raceway, minimum 3/4 inch trade size, for all required wired connections.

3. System to monitor and record, in 15 minute intervals:
a. Inverter status.
b. Instantaneous power (kW).
c. Cumulative energy production (kWh).

4. System real-time and historical data to be accessible from the following locations:

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Photovoltaic Collectors 26 31 00 - 6
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Use open circuiting, short circuiting, or opaque covering to disable modules, array or portions of array prior to installation and service.

B. Roof-Mounted Arrays: Protect roof and adjacent roof-mounted items from damage.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

D. Mount equipment such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor, ground, or working platform.

E. Circuiting Requirements. in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 19:

1. Photovoltaic DC System Conductor Color Code:
a. Negative Grounded System:
1) Positive: Red.
2) Negative/Grounded: White.

2. Maintain separation of photovoltaic and non-photovoltaic circuits in accordance with NFPA

70. F. Grounding and Bonding Requirements, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:

1. Ensure that there is only one AC System bonding connection between grounding system and grounded/neutral conductor, including external connections and connections internal to equipment.

2. Grounded DC Systems: Ensure that there is only one point of system grounding connection to the grounded conductor, including external connections and connections internal to equipment.

G. Identification Requirements, in Addition to Those Specified in Section 26 05 53:

1. Use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction to identify the presence of multiple power sources and the location of main service disconnecting means and each photovoltaic system disconnecting means. Locate at main service disconnecting means and at each photovoltaic system disconnecting means. Verify format and descriptions with authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use identification nameplate to identify each photovoltaic system disconnecting means with text "PV SYSTEM DISCONNECT".

3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify systems equipped with rapid shutdown and associated rapid shutdown switch(es). Format, descriptions, and locations to comply with NFPA 70 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify the information required by NFPA 70 for marking of direct-current photovoltaic power sources. Locate at each DC disconnect means requiring marking.

5. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify the interactive system point of interconnection at the disconnecting means as a power source and with the rated AC output current and the nominal operating AC voltage.

6. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for photovoltaic system disconnecting means. Include the word message "Warning - Electric Shock Hazard; Terminals on the line and load sides may be energized in the open position" or approved equivalent.

7. Use wire and cable markers to identify photovoltaic system source, output, and inverter circuit conductors at all points of termination, connection, and splices.

8. Use voltage markers, identification labels, stenciled text, or suitable permanent marking approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify exposed raceways, cable trays, pull boxes, junction boxes, and conduit bodies with the text "Warning: Photovoltaic Power Source" at maximum intervals of 10 feet in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. See article "SYSTEM STARTUP" below for additional requirements related to testing and inspection.

C. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field reports with submittals.

D. Inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:

1. Inspect each system component for damage and defects.

2. Verify that equipment enclosures, boxes, and associated connections installed outdoors are weatherproof.

3. Verify proper wiring connections have been made and check for conductor continuity.

Verify proper polarity.

4. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Measure and record voltages at the inverter AC and DC inputs.

6. Measure and record AC output power.

7. Perform inverter functional test.
a. Grid-Tied Inverters: Include simulation of loss of utility power and subsequent power restoration.

8. Verify proper operation of monitoring system.

E. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.

3.05 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to assist in performing system startup. Include manufacturer's detailed startup procedures with submittals.

B. Obtain Owner's approval prior to performing system startup.

C. Grid-Tied Systems: Obtain Utility Company's approval prior to performing system startup.

D. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean modules using only methods recommended by manufacturer to avoid scratches and other damage. Clean exposed surfaces on other components to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of photovoltaic system.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.

3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Photovoltaic Collectors 26 31 00 - 8
B. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a separate maintenance contract for the service and maintenance of photovoltaic system for two years from date of Substantial Completion, to include the work described below; Include a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.

C. Conduct site visit at least once every six months to perform inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance. Conduct tests similar to those made during original field quality control testing.

Submit report to Owner comparing test results with those of original tests along with evaluations and recommendations.

D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:

1. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner.

2. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.

END OF SECTION 26 31 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Central Battery Equipment 26 33 23 - 1
SECTION 26 33 23

CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Emergency power supply.

B. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) centralized emergency lighting inverters.

C. Remote trouble alarm indicator.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting:

D. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting: Luminaires for interface with centralized emergency lighting inverters.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).

1.04 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.05 RATINGS
A. NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2022.

B. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

C. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Inverter Output Frequency: 60 Hz plus 1 percent.

B. Coordination:

C. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum.

D. Maximum Recharge Time: 12 hours following 1.5 hour discharge.

E. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 10 percent at full resistive load.

F. Battery: Nickel cadmium, sealed type battery.

G. Accessories: Provisions for remote battery alarm.

H. Instrumentation and Alarms: NFPA 111.

I. Charger: Dual rate, designed to maintain battery in full-charge condition during normal conditions.

J. Coordination:

1. Coordinate compatibility of centralized emergency lighting inverters to be installed with work provided under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by CEC.

3. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Central Battery Equipment 26 33 23 - 2
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, input/output voltages, power ratings, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, and installed features and accessories.

D. Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service.

G. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

H. Maintenance contracts.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed circuiting arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

3. Battery Fuses: See Section 26 28 13 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). CEC (California Electrical Code)

2. NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code).

3. NFPA 111; meet requirements for Level 1 system.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience with centralized emergency lighting inverter systems of similar size, type, and complexity; manufacturer's authorized installer.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to inverter system components, enclosure, and finish.

D. Do not exceed maximum ambient temperature requirements for batteries at any time, which reduces battery service life. Replace batteries exposed to temperatures in excess of manufacturer's requirements.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Inverter Assemblies: Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

C. Batteries: Provide pro-rata warranty for the duration of rated design life.

2.01 CENTRALIZED EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide complete centralized emergency lighting inverter system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Inverter Assemblies: Manufactured units consisting of inverters, batteries, enclosures, and associated components specifically designed for emergency lighting applications; microprocessor-based utilizing pulse width modulation (PWM) with insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT's); listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

1. Battery Run Times of 90 Minutes: Listed as complying with UL 924 for "emergency lighting and power equipment".

2. Battery Run Times Other than 90 Minutes: Listed as complying with UL 924 for "auxiliary lighting and power equipment".

D. Provide inverters and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Increase indicated power ratings as required to accommodate any applicable inverter load restrictions.

F. Inverters Installed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum rated; listed and labeled as complying with UL 2043, suitable for use in air-handling spaces.

G. Battery System:

1. Provide battery capacity as required for achieving battery run time indicated.

2. Battery Charger: Microprocessor-controlled, temperature compensated; capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully charged condition within time required by NFPA 111 and UL 924 unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide automatic low voltage battery disconnect to prevent battery "deep discharge" damage.

H. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

2. Hinged Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

I. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category B.

J. Automatic Sequence of Operations:

1. Upon failure or degradation of primary/normal input power, transfer load to battery power.

2. When primary/normal input power has been restored, retransfer load to primary/normal power and recharge battery.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of inverter assemblies are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.

D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive inverter assemblies.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install inverter assemblies in accordance with applicable requirements of NECA 416.

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted inverter assemblies on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Notify Owner and Architect at least two weeks prior to scheduled inspections and tests.

C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.

D. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing, including load bank.

E. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 111.

G. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

H. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.2.

I. Batteries and Charger: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.18.

J. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting inverter system to Owner, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of emergency lighting inverter system.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Location: At project site.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed inverter assemblies from subsequent construction operations.

3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide to Owner a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a separate maintenance contract for the service and maintenance of emergency lighting inverter system for two years from date of Substantial Completion; Include a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.

END OF SECTION 26 33 23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surge Protective Devices 26 43 00 - 1
SECTION 26 43 00

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surge protective devices for service entrance locations.

B. Surge protective devices for distribution locations.

C. Surge protective devices for branch panelboard locations.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear.

C. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards.

D. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards.

E. Section 26 24 19 - Motor-Control Centers.

F. Section 26 25 13 - Low-Voltage Busways.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. EMI/RFI: Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference.

B. SPD: Surge Protective Device.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

C. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

E. UL 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate size and location of overcurrent device compatible with the actual surge protective device and location to be installed. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to ordering equipment.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings, repetitive surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes, maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current (I-n), short circuit current rating (SCCR), connection means including any required external overcurrent protection, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, service condition requirements, and installed features.

C. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections with wire and circuit breaker/fuse sizes.

D. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for compliance with the following standards:

1. UL 1449.

2. UL 1283 (for Type 2 SPDs).

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include information on status indicators and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

F. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surge Protective Devices 26 43 00 - 2
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of surge protective devices.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NEC.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store in a clean, dry space in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide minimum five year warranty covering repair or replacement of surge protective devices showing evidence of failure due to defective materials or workmanship.

C. Exclude surge protective devices from any clause limiting warranty responsibility for acts of nature, including lightning, stated elsewhere.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Factory-installed, Internally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:

1. Same as manufacturer of equipment containing surge protective device, to provide a complete listed assembly including SPD.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Source Limitations: Furnish surge protective devices produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service; listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended; system voltage as indicated on the drawings.

B. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

1. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.

2. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.

C. Mounting for Field-installed, Externally Mounted SPDs: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following locations:

1. Provide surface-mounted SPD where mounted in non-public areas or adjacent to surface- mounted equipment.

2. Provide flush-mounted SPD where mounted in public areas or adjacent to flush-mounted equipment.

D. Equipment Containing Factory-installed, Internally Mounted SPDs: Listed and labeled as a complete assembly including SPD.

2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally mounted or factory-installed, internally mounted SPDs.

B. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of service disconnect overcurrent device.

C. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.

D. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.

E. Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Not less than 5,000 impulses.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surge Protective Devices 26 43 00 - 3
F. Provide surge rated integral disconnect switch for SPDs not connected to a dedicated circuit breaker or fused switch or not direct bus connected.

2.04 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR DISTRIBUTION LOCATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally mounted or factory-installed, internally mounted SPDs.

B. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 or Type 2.

C. Distribution locations include SPDs connected to distribution panelboards, motor control centers, and busway.

D. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.

E. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.

F. Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Not less than 3,500 impulses.

G. Provide surge rated integral disconnect switch for SPDs not connected to a dedicated circuit breaker or fused switch or not direct bus connected.

2.05 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH PANELBOARD LOCATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally mounted or factory-installed, internally mounted SPDs.

B. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 or Type 2.

C. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.

D. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 60 kA per mode/120 kA per phase.

E. Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Not less than 2,000 impulses.

F. Provide surge rated integral disconnect switch for SPDs not connected to a dedicated circuit breaker or fused switch or not direct bus connected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent with the service voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.

C. Verify that electrical equipment is ready to accept connection of the SPD and that installed overcurrent device is consistent with requirements of drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

D. Verify system grounding and bonding is in accordance with Section 26 05 26, including bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems where applicable.

Do not energize SPD until deficiencies have been corrected.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NEC.

D. Unless indicated otherwise, connect service entrance surge protective device on load side of service disconnect main overcurrent device.

E. Provide conductors with minimum ampacity as indicated on the drawings, as required by NFPA 70, and not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor size.

F. Install conductors between SPD and equipment terminations as short and straight as possible, not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length. Breaker locations may be reasonably rearranged in order to provide leads as short and straight as possible. Twist conductors together to reduce inductance.

G. Do not energize SPD until bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems is complete in accordance with Section 26 05 26 where applicable. Replace SPDs damaged by improper or missing neutral-ground bond.

H. Disconnect SPD prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPD connected.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surge Protective Devices 26 43 00 - 4
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Section 7.19.1.

D. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control submittals.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 43 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 1
SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires.

B. Emergency lighting units.

C. Exit signs.

D. Drivers.

E. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylighting controls.

F. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

G. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.

B. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 1989 (Corrigendum 2019).

C. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).

D. IES LM-63 - Approved Method: IES Standard File Format for the Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2019.

E. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; 2019.

F. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources; 2021.

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

H. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Lighting Systems; 2006.

I. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.

J. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2023.

K. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012 (Reaffirmed 2018).

L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

M. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

N. UL 844 - Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.

2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standard format upon request.

D. Samples:

1. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire where indicated.

E. Field quality control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Lenses and Louvers: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type.

3. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 3
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for LED luminaires, including drivers.

C. Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of CEC.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the source and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. Hazardous (Classified) Location Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 844 for the classification of the installed location.

H. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

I. LED Tape Lighting Systems: Provide all power supplies, drivers, cables, connectors, channels, covers, mounting accessories, and interfaces as necessary to complete installation.

1. LED Tape - General Requirements:
a. Listed.
b. Designed for field cutting in accordance with listing. c. Wet Location Applications: IEC 60529, IP 68 (waterproof) rated.

2. White LED Tape:
a. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 90.

J. Track Lighting Systems: Provide track compatible with specified track heads, with all connectors, power feed fittings, dead ends, hangers and canopies as necessary to complete installation.

K. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

C. Battery:

1. Sealed maintenance-free lead calcium unless otherwise indicated.

2. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated.

D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation.

E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

F. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status.

G. Where indicated, provide units with integral time delay to maintain emergency illumination for 15 minutes after restoration of normal power source.

H. Accessories:

1. Provide compatible accessory mounting brackets where indicated or required to complete installation.

2. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated.

3. Provide compatible accessory wire guards where indicated.

4. Where indicated, provide emergency remote heads that are compatible with the emergency lighting unit they are connected to and suitable for the installed location.

2.04 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.

2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

2.05 LED DRIVERS
A. LED Drivers - General Requirements:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

3. LED Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA 410.

B. Dimmable LED Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.

2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with CEC.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting).

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

F. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.

G. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

H. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.

2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so.

3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing members or to building structure.

4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.

5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners.

6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s), minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to building structure.

7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements.

I. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

J. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.

2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height.

3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet nominal length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.

4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

K. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire.

L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

N. Emergency Lighting Units:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.

O. Exit Signs:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from circuit indicated.

Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.

P. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05

53. Q. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting) and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 51 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 1
SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires.

B. Poles and accessories.

C. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for concrete bases for poles.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including outdoor motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls.

G. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles.

H. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

I. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.

B. AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals; 2013, with Editorial Revision (2022).

C. ANSI C136.10 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing; 2023.

D. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 1989 (Corrigendum 2019).

E. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code(R) (NESC(R)); 2023.

F. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).

G. IES LM-63 - Approved Method: IES Standard File Format for the Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2019.

H. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; 2019.

I. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources; 2021.

J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

K. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000 (Reaffirmed 2006).

L. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012 (Reaffirmed 2018).

M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

N. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 1598C - Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Retrofit Luminaire Conversion Kits; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height.

2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

3. Provide structural calculations for each pole proposed for substitution.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.

2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standard format upon request.

3. Lamps: Include rated life and initial and mean lumen output.

4. Poles: Include information on maximum supported effective projected area (EPA) and weight for the design wind speed.

D. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on lamp mercury content and rated lamp life, showing compliance with specified requirements.

E. Samples:

1. Provide one sample(s) of each specified luminaire where indicated.

F. Certificates for Poles and Accessories: Manufacturer's documentation that products are suitable for the luminaires to be installed and comply with designated structural design criteria.

G. Field Quality Control Reports.

1. Include test report indicating measured illumination levels.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.

3. Extra Ballasts: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type.

4. Extra Fuses: Five percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.

5. Touch-Up Paint: 2 gallons, to match color of pole finish.

K. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations, luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 3
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated.

H. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

I. LED Tape Lighting Systems: Provide all power supplies, drivers, cables, connectors, channels, covers, mounting accessories, and interfaces as necessary to complete installation.

1. LED Tape - General Requirements:
a. Listed.
b. Designed for field cutting in accordance with listing. c. Wet Location Applications: IEC 60529, IP 68 (waterproof) rated.

2. White LED Tape:
a. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 90.

J. Exposed Hardware: Stainless steel.

2.03 LED DRIVERS
A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

B. Dimmable LED Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.

2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.

2.04 POLES
A. All Poles:

1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed.

2. Structural Design Criteria:
a. Comply with AASHTO LTS.
b. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed.

3. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Shape: Square straight, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Unless otherwise indicated, provide with the following features/accessories:
a. Top cap.
b. Anchor bolts with leveling nuts or leveling shims.
c. Anchor base cover.
d. Provision for pole-mounted weatherproof GFI receptacle where indicated. e. Hinged base.

B. Metal Poles: Provide ground lug, accessible from handhole or transformer base.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2" size, factory finished to match luminaire or field-painted as directed.

B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted as directed.

C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with CEC C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

F. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.

G. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

I. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.

2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height.

3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet in length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.

4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

J. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire.

K. Pole-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Maintain the following minimum clearances:
a. Comply with IEEE C2.
b. Comply with utility company requirements.

2. Foundation-Mounted Poles:
a. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for poles as indicated, in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
1) Install anchor bolts plumb per template furnished by pole manufacturer. 2) Position conduits to enter pole shaft.
b. Install foundations plumb.
c. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts or shims as required to adjust to plumb. d. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque. e. Install non-shrink grout between pole anchor base and concrete foundation, leaving small channel for condensation drainage.
f. Install anchor base covers or anchor bolt covers as indicated.

3. Embedded Poles: Install poles plumb as indicated.

4. Grounding:
a. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation reinforcement to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
b. Provide supplementary ground rod electrode as specified in Section 26 05 26 at each pole bonded to grounding system as indicated.

5. Install separate service conductors, 12 AWG copper, from each luminaire down to handhole for connection to branch circuit conductors.

6. Install non-breakaway in-line fuse holders and fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 in pole handhole or transformer base for each ungrounded conductor.

7. Install weather resistant GFI duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover as specified in Section 26 27 26 in designated poles.

L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

N. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

E. Measure illumination levels at night with calibrated meters to verify conformance with performance requirements. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's instructions to achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

3.09 ATTACHMENTS
A. Luminaire schedule.

B. Luminaire cut sheets.

END OF SECTION 26 56 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 1

SECTION 27 10 00

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work under this section includes all final d esign, material, equipment, supplies, labor, testing, and accessories required to furnish and install a complete Structured Cabling System (SCS) as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. The SCS shall be defined as all cables, equipment, products, etc, as indicated on the drawings, and mentioned in these specifications. (Please note, for this project, that the SCS encompasses more than just voice and data cabling.)
B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specificati ons for the Contractor to provide and install a complete, fully operational, and tested system.

C. All miscellaneous system components including, b ut not limited to, cables, termination equipment, punch blocks, patch panels, ladder racks , backboards, equipment racks, and any other related items shall be furnished and installed complete under this section, such that the system shall perform all functions listed herein in compliance with all of the specified requirements.

D. Schedule is paramount to the project’s success. With this, the structured cabling contractor will have to be a team player, continually working with the team to facilitate expeditious design, procurement, and construction processes. SCS Contr actor shall be required to attend weekly construction meetings through the duration of the project.

E. This project will be performed in a phased const ruction format. Each phase of construction will be completely installed, labeled and tested, to the greatest extent physically possible, before moving to the next phase.

1.02 RELATED WORK, STANDARDS, DOCUMENTS AND PUBLICA TIONS A. Each agency's relative codes, standards, and rec ommended practices apply to the voice/data cabling systems and their components as specified herein:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI T1.336 Engineering requirements for a unive rsal telecommunications frame b. ANSI T1.404 Network and customer installation in terfaces – DS3 and metallic interface specification

2. Building Industry Consulting Service Internation al (BICSI) a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual ( TDMM) – latest edition. b. Customer – Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (CO -OSP) 2004.

3. Comite Consultatif Internationale de Telegraphiq ue et Telephonique (CCITT)

4. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-as applicable for measurement a nd Testing of Fiber Optic Systems
b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-492-as applicable for specification s for Optical Fibers c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526 Standard Test Procedures for Fi ber Optic Systems d. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabl ing for Customer Premises e. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommuni cations Cabling Standard f. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommu nications Cabling Components Standards
g. ANSI-TIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Component s Standard h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard for C ommercial Telecommunications Infrastructure 2002.
i. ANSI/TIA/EIA-J-STD-607-A or latest Commercial Bu ilding Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 2002
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 2

5. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
a. FCC Part 68 Rule

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM )
a. E814-02 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of T hrough-Penetration Fire Stops

7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
a. Communications Wire and Cable for Premises Wirin g.

8. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
a. IEC 61935-01 Generic Cabling Systems - Specifica tion for the testing of balanced communication cabling in accordance with ISO/IEC 11 801 Part 1: Installed Cabling b. IEC 61935-02 Generic Cabling Systems - Specifica tion for the testing of balanced communication cabling in accordance with ISO/IEC 11 801 Part 2: Patch Cords and Work Area Cords

9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer s (IEEE) a. IEEE 802 Specification for Local Area Networks
b. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 – Guide on the Surge Environmen t in Low-Voltage (1000V or less) AC Power Circuits 2002

10. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) a. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology – Generic C abling for Customer Premises 1995 plus Amendments 1 & 2.

11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. ANSI/NFPA-70 National Electric Code 2002(NEC)
b. ANSI/NFPA-75 Standard for the protection of info rmation technology equipment 2003

12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association ( NEMA)

13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration ( OSHA)

14. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
a. ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 2003.
b. ANSI/TIA-758-A Customer-Owned Outside Plant Tele communications Cabling Standard 2004
c. ANSI/TIA-942 Telecommunications Infrastructure S tandard for Data Centers 2005

15. Underwriters Laboratories Standards (UL)

16. Intetek Testing Services ETL SEMKO (ETL)
a. The contractor shall be responsible for obtainin g and utilizing the latest Structured Cabling, Architectural, and Electrical plans.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer: The term “manufacturer” shall be d efined as the company, or group of companies, that actually produces the products meeting the requirements of Section 2 of this document. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven- (7) year’s experience in manufacturing products of this type and shall be ISO 9001 Certified. The products, summarized in this specification, shall be supplied by a single manufacturer, with the exception of:

1. Data racks and other hardware that is not define d as part of the channel test configuration by ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.

2. Fiber Optic Cable and Outside plant (OSP) fiber cable.

3. Channel solutions consisting of cabling and conn ectivity hardware independently tested by UL or ETL and that are listed in Section 2 of this document.

4. Cables manufactured by another manufacturer spec ifically called out on the drawings.

B. Contractor: The term “contractor” shall be defin ed as the company, or group of companies, that actually installs the products per Section 3 of this document. The contractor selected to provide the installation of this system shall be certified by the manufacturer in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described herein.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 3

1. The contractor shall hold a valid State of Calif ornia C-10 or C-7 license, shall have completed at least ten (10) projects of equal scope, shall have been in business of furnishing and installing systems of this scope and magnitude for at least five (5) years, and capable of being bonded to assure the Owner’s P roject Manager of performance and satisfactory service during the guarantee period.

2. The contractor shall hold all other licenses req uired by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3. All work shall be performed under the supervisio n of a company accredited by the manufacturer and such accreditation must be presented.

4. The contractor shall be a manufacturer’s authori zed/certified installer and warranty station for the equipment offered and shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The Contractor must be certified by the manufacturer a minimum of 180 days prior to bid opening.

5. The contractor selected for this Project must ad here to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this Project.

6. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of fiber optic cable and Category 6 metallic premise distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately train ed in the used of such tools and equipment.

7. The contractor shall have the capability to prod uce the AutoCAD documentation as required elsewhere in this specification.

1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. In order to maintain a high degree of quality as surance, the Contractor shall, without exception, use the parts and supplies as specified on the drawings and in this specification.

B. For any proposed product substitution or when th e Contractor intends to include an “or equal” product in the bid pricing, provide a substitution request submittal to the Owner’s Project Manager for review no later than fifteen (15) calendar days prior to Bid submittal. This report shall include:

1. Description of how the proposed product(s) will impact meeting the project completion date, indicate item(s) with lead times and expected delivery date(s).

2. Itemized cost comparisons between the proposed p roduct(s) and the listed product(s).

3. Detailed technical analysis of the electrical an d mechanical specification differences between the proposed product(s) and the listed prod uct(s).

4. ETL “Verified” or UL “Verified” test lab documen tation for the proposed product(s), component(s) and assemblies.

5. Proposed product identification, manufacturer li terature (specifications and cut sheets).

6. Name, address and contact information of several similar projects where the proposed product(s) have been used.

7. Name, address and contact information of the pro posed product(s) manufacturer’s local representative.

8. Sample proposed product(s) manufacturer’s warran ty.

C. The Owner’s Design Team/Project Manager must app rove any proposed product(s) substitution item in writing. The Owner’s Design Team/Project M anager reserves the right to require a complete sample of any proposed product(s) and may request a sample tested by an independent testing consultant to prove equality. The decision of the Owner’s Design Team/Project Manager regarding equality of proposed product(s) items will be final.

D. If a proposed product(s) is given final acceptan ce by the Owner’s Project Manager, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner’s Design Team/ Project Manager for the costs to review the proposed product(s) substitution(s), and for any additional engineering charges, and shall pay all charges of other trades resulting from this product(s) use, at no cost to the Owner.

E. It is a mandatory requirement that a single Cont ractor perform the work described in this LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 4

specification.

1.05 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT
A. Submittals shall be presented and formatted per the guidelines in the Division 1 section of this RFP package.

B. All cut sheets shall represent the latest versio n, part number, and revision of the product.

Where multiple products or part numbers appear on a page, a bold arrow or circle shall indicate which product or part numbers are to be used as part of the installation. The submittal shall include all descriptive pages associated with the product, not just the page showing the part number.

1.06 BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Qualification Certificates: Contractor shal l submit current training certificates for design, engineering, installation and testing of the specified products.

B. Manufacturer Tests: Contractor shall submit all manufacturer test information. If equivalent product(s) are substituted, the equivalent product(s) must show demonstrated and documented equivalence to the product(s) specified.

C. Bid Forms: Contractor shall submit completed an y detailed bid forms provided with this specification or elsewhere in the RFP Package. Quo ted price shall be broken down and categorized per the bid forms. All unit prices and alternates shall be included. Responses with incomplete or omitted bid forms shall be rejected.

D. Material and System Installation Guarantees: Th e Contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6 cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including installation) of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C and 569-B.

1. Complete documentation regarding the manufacture rs warranty shall be submitted as part of the bid. This shall include, but is not limited to, a sample of the warranty that would be provided to the customer when the installation is complete and documentation of the support procedure for warranty issues.

2. A systems application assurance manual documenti ng the vendor supported applications and application guidelines shall be provided as part of the submittals.

E. Project Narrative: Contractor shall submit a sum mary of the scope of work, in their own words, illustrating a complete and thorough understanding of the project. The narrative shall include, but not be limited to cable drop counts, riser and backbone cable type and quantity, project staffing and duration, quality assurance procedures and methodology, problem escalation procedures, and project schedule.

F. Hours: Provide the total number of estimated ma n-hours used to calculate the Base Bid.

G. Resume: A resume of qualification shall be subm itted with the Contractor's bid indicating the following:

1. A copy of their valid State of California C-7 Lo w-Voltage license.

2. Summaries of at least ten (10) projects of equal scope completed within the last (5) years whereas at least one (1) shall be a warranted project from the manufacturer of the proposed solution. Project Summary to include a project description, number of cable drops, duration, date completed, and complete contact information for a representative of the customer familiar with the contractor’s work.

3. A signed letter from the contractor’s bonding co mpany indicating their maximum project bonding capability.

4. A technical resume of experience for the contrac tor's Project Manager who will be assigned to this project. This individual will remain as Project Manager for the duration of the project. The Contractor may change Project Managers only with the Owner’s Project Manager’s written approval.

5. A list of technical product installation trainin g attended by the contractor’s personnel within the past two (2) years that will install the SCS system shall be submitted with the LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 5

response.

6. All of the above for any sub-contractor, who wil l assist the SCS contractor in performance of this work.

H. Manufacturer’s Letter: The Contractor shall fur nish a letter from the manufacturer, which certifies that the contractor is the Authorized/Certified Installer and that the equipment shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendatio ns.

I. Bill of Materials: The bill of materials shall contain a complete list of every component, part or device by part description, manufacturer and manufacturer’s part number, quantity and unit of measure. See example format below:

1. Description Part # Quantity Unit of Measure

2. CAT6 Station Systimax 10 boxes 1000ft/box

3. Cable (blue) #2071

4. This information may be used by the Owner to eva luate the Contractor’s general understanding of the project scope during the bid evaluation. Errors/Omissions from this bill of material do not relieve the contractor from providing all material, components, labor, etc., as outlined in this specification and on the drawings to provide a complete and useable structured cabling system.

J. Copies: Provide 3 copies of the above informati on at bid time.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Within forty-five (45) calendar days after the d ate of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the following:

B. Submittal Binder: Submit eight (8) copies of th e complete Submittal Binder to the Owner for review. The binder shall consist of four major sections with each section separated by index tabs. Each page in the binder shall be numbered sequentially and shall be summarized in the index.

1. The first section shall be the "title sheet" whi ch shall include the submittal date, project title and address, name of the contractor, and name of th e Owner.

2. The second section shall contain an index includ ing the page number, product Manufacturer, product part number, product description, and corresponding specification section number or drawing sheet number where that product is referenced. Also listed in the index shall be each item of test equipment to be used to test the optical fiber and copper components. Include all patch cords and other specialized components.

3. The third section shall contain original manufac turer cut sheets for all of the materials that meet the requirements listed in Section 2 of this specification and all materials described on the construction drawings. Also include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all testing equipment to be used for completion of the project. All pages shall be numbered sequentially corresponding to the index. On each c ut-sheet, provide an indicating arrow next to each part number of proposed material.

4. The fourth section shall contain a Cabling Diagr am. The diagram shall be based on the drawings included in the Construction Documents. It shall be updated to show quantities and part numbers for all components including patch panels, cable, conduit, cabinets and equipment racks, splices, splice cases and all other associated components.

5. Failure to comply with any of the requirements l isted above may result in the rejection of the entire submittal package.

C. Component Samples and Mock-ups: Provide one ful l size installation sample mock-up of each of the following components for approval. All samples are to be fully labeled per these specifications.

1. Optical Fiber Cable Samples: Provide a 24” leng th of each type of optical fiber cable being used as a part of this installation; each sample shall be complete with strength members, outer jacket and all elements. The outer jacket shall be stripped back 12" from one end of the sample to allow the individual fiber sub-cable groups to be inspected for all LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 6

cables. Each color-coded sub-cable jacket shall be stripped back 6" from the end of the cable to allow its individual elements to be inspected. Label each cable as detailed in this specification. The sample shall show all the cable markings, including part numbers, manufacturer, and lengths.

2. Copper Cable Samples: Provide a 24” length of e ach type and color of copper cable being used as a part of this installation. The outer jacket shall be stripped back 6" from one end of the sample to allow the individual pairs to be inspected for all cables. Label each cable as detailed in this specification. The sample shall show all the cable markings, including part numbers, manufacturer, and lengths.

3. Category 6 Patch Panel: Provide a Category 6 pa tch panel. This shall consist of the specified patch panel, fully loaded, complete with all associated components. The patch panel shall be fully loaded with the maximum number of cables dressed into the patch panel and terminated as described in this specification. All strain relief shall be provided as part of the sample. A 36” length of each cable shall be dressed and attached to the strain relief with “hook and loop” straps per these specifications. The unit shall be fully labeled as detailed in these specifications.

4. Outlet Samples.
a. Provide a mock-up of each communications outlet, as listed below. The sample is intended to represent a typical communications outlet and shall include all associated parts to make a complete sample. Provide bushings and strain relief for the distribution cable jacket, demonstrating how the cable shall be secured. Label the outlet and each connector as detailed in this specification. b. Provide samples of the following outlet configur ations:
1) Wall-mounted outlet - provide the faceplate, ter minated communications outlets, the electrical backbox, and a 36" length of the relevant cable(s). 2) Wall-mounted phone outlet - provide faceplate an d jack insert only. 3) Furniture outlet – provide faceplate, bezel, out lets, cable and labeling installed in a modular furniture baseboard or beltline raceway sample. The contractor shall obtain a sample of the modular furniture system baseboard or beltline raceway where the outlet will be installed from the furniture system vendor. If the modular furniture system has not been selected or finalized, the contractor shall proceed with all other tasks or phases of the project, but shall not place an order for furniture system faceplates, bezels, etc.. until furniture system samples are available and this mock-up has been accepted by the owner. The Owner shall not be held responsible for any re-stocking, re-ordering or other fees and charges resulting from ordering parts prior to mock-up acceptance.

5. Installation shall not proceed until the sample mock-ups meet the satisfaction of the Owner. Sample mock-ups are intended to represent t he components that are to be installed as part of this project; therefore, they are to be provided with all associated components and labeling required for the final installation. Upon acceptance, the mock- ups will be used as the standards by which the quality of work on the project by the contractor shall be judged. Any installation that does not meet this standard shall be replaced or re-worked by the contractor as approved by the Owner at no additional cost.

All samples will be retained by the Owner. The Owner shall not be held responsible for project delays resulting from delays in sample mock-up approval.

1.08 POST INSTALLATION SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the comp letion of work, the Contractor shall submit the following:

B. Record Documentation

1. Final Test Results: Test results for each cable indicating tests performed, results obtained and values measured. Test results shall be provided in electronic format with the associated application (if required) for viewing.

2. As-Built Drawings: Contractor shall provide a c omplete set of professionally drafted "E" LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 7

size (30" x 42"), unless otherwise noted, reproducible bond as-built drawings, generated on AutoDesk AutoCAD 2004 or later.
a. MDF, BDF and IDF Diagrams - Including:
1) Cable routing.
2) Position of all components and apparatus.
3) Detailed layout of the wallfield(s).
4) Labeling plan.
b. Work Area Floor Plans - Including:
1) Detailed cable routes.
2) Labeled workstation locations. Labels to match approved workstation faceplate labels.
c. Cross Connect Documentation - Including:
1) Cross-connect records for all voice, and data de vices. d. Riser Distribution Plan.
e. Cable Tray, Conduit, and Raceway Plans (if appli cable). f. Campus Distribution Plan (if applicable).
g. Building Control Plans (if applicable).

C. As-Built Documentation Display in each MDF, BDF & IDF.

D. Contractor shall install a complete Contractor-p rovided, professionally drafted as-built floor plan in color in each MDF, BDF & IDF mounting frame. Ea ch floor plan, generated on AutoDesk AutoCAD 2004 or later and printed in color, shall depict all jack locations in each modular furniture cubicle and all other areas. Also depicted shall be in-building antenna, reader board, CTV jack locations or any other communications outlet cables by the SCS contractor. All jack locations shall be color coordinated with the Owner ’s labeling scheme as described elsewhere in this specification.

E. Contractor shall provide to Owner one set of CD ROMs containing all post installation submittals.

F. Warranty Documentation:

G. Contractor shall present to Owner all warranty G eneral and Specific Warranty Documents per Warranty Specifications Sections. Warranty shall commence after final acceptance of System by Owner.

1.09 GENERAL SYSTEM PRODUCT, INSTALLATION AND OVERA LL SYSTEM WARRANTY A. Prior to Owner acceptance, the contractor shall provide to the Owner’s Project Manager, a manufacturers product and performance warranty. Th is will require a submittal of the required pre-job certification registration forms as well as the required project closing information. The Owner will only acknowledge acceptance upon submitt al of a valid manufacturers warranty.

B. The warranty shall commence from the date of the Owners final written acceptance of the completed project.

C. All conditions for obtaining the manufacturers w arranty shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.

D. The contractor shall maintain a competent servic e organization and shall, if requested, submit a service maintenance agreement to the Owner after the end of the guarantee period.

E. A typewritten notice shall be posted at the equi pment rack that shall indicate the firm, address and telephone number to call when service is necess ary. The notice shall be mounted in a neatly finished metal frame with a clear plastic window and securely attached to the inside of the door.

1.10 SPECIFIC SYSTEM PRODUCT, INSTALLATION AND OVER ALL SYSTEM WARRANTY A. A twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance for the voice/data wiring system shall be provided as follows:

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 8

1. 20 Year Extended Product Warranty
a. The 20 Year Extended Product Warranty shall ensu re against product defects, that all approved cabling components exceed the specific ations of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801, exceed the attenuation and NEXT requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801 for cabling ch annels, that the installation will exceed the loss and bandwidth requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801 for fiber channels, for a twenty (20) year period. The warranty shall apply to all passive SCS components.
b. The 20 Year Extended Product Warranty shall cove r the replacement or repair of defective product(s) and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective product(s) for a twenty (20) year period.

2. 20 Year Application Assurance
a. The 20 Year Application Assurance shall cover th e failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support, as well as additional application(s) introduced in the future, up to 350Mbps parallel transmission schemes, by recognized standards or user forums that use the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C or ISO/IEC 11801 component and channel specifications for cabl ing, for a twenty (20) year period.

3. System Certification
a. Upon successful completion of the installation a nd subsequent inspection, the Owner’s Project Manager shall be provided with a nu mbered certificate, from the manufacturing company, registering the installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All equipment listed herein will be by:

1. Structured Cabling System (SCS): “Commscope Unip rise UltraMedia” or AMP “Netconnect Category 6”.

2. Cabinets, Racks, and Ladder tray: Chatsworth, Co oper B-line.

3. Horizontal and Vertical wire management: Chatswo rth.

4. Riser and OSP Fiber Cable: Systimax, Berktek, AM P.

5. Riser and OSP Copper Cable: General, Superior Es sex

6. Protectors: Circa, Systimax, Porta Systems or Ma rconi B. It is the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard set forth in these specifications and the equipment's technical data sheets.

C. The functions and features specified are vital t o the operation of this facility. Therefore, inclusion of a component's manufacturer in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the contractor from strict compliance with the requirements of this specification.

2.02 OUTLETS
A. Faceplates

1. All Faceplates shall be available in single, dup lex, triplex, quadplex, or sixplex arrangement in a single gang configuration.

2. Faceplates shall be available in eightplex arran gement in a dual gang box configuration.

3. Surface mount boxes shall be available in single , dual, quad, sixplex and twelveplex configuration.

4. Modular furniture faceplates shall be available in single, dual, triple and quad configuration for the Owner’s modular existing and/or new modular furniture. Faceplates shall be flush- mounted in the modular furniture. Surface mounted boxes/faceplates are unacceptable.

The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the Owner’s modular furniture contractor to determine faceplate requirements. The contractor shall provide and install all parts/fittings necessary to meet the requirements of this section.

5. Wall mounted phone jack faceplates shall be sing le gang configuration, constructed of LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 9

stainless steel and have two standard phone mountin g posts located above and below the jack opening.

B. Communications outlets shall consist of one, two or three gang utility outlet boxes plates equipped with 8-pin modular (RJ-45) jacks utilizing T568B wiring. All outlet cabling shall terminate on termination blocks at their associated Main Distribution Frame (MDF)/Building Distribution Frame (BDF)/Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) Rooms, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans, or wi thin this document, all data wall outlets for 23 AWG copper cable shall be:

1. 8-position/8-conductor modular outlets for data or voice.

2. Insulation displacement.

3. Support Universal applications in a multi-vendor environment, accepting modular RJ-45 plugs for data or voice outlets.

4. Provide with blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Jack module arrangement is shown on the drawings. Provide color-coded inserts at each outlet, termination blocks, and at patch panels.

D. Category 6 Gigabit outlets

1. All Category 6 outlets shall meet or exceed Cate gory 6 transmission requirements for connecting hardware, as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program.

2. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being in a modular patching situation or as a modular telecommunication outlet (TO) supporting current 10Base-T, Token Ring, 100 Mbps TP-PMD, 155 Mbps ATM, 622 Mbps ATM using paral lel transmission schemes and evolving high-speed, high-bandwidth applications, including Ethernet, 1000BASE-T and

1.2 Gbps ATM.

3. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being installed in any modular faceplate, modular patch panel, frame, or surface-mounted box without special couplings or adapters.

4. The Category 6 outlets shall have improved pair splitters and wider channel for enhanced conductor placement. The outlet shall also have a low-profile wire cap, which protects against contamination and secures the connection. Multicolored identification labels shall be available to assure accurate installation.

5. Product Specification: Uniprise (UNJ600-xx) or AMP SL Series (1375055-x) Category 6.

2.03 STATION CABLE
A. Category 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cables shall extend between the station location and it’s associated TC and consist of 4 pair, 23 gauge solid insulated wire, and shall terminate on 8 pin modular jacks at each outlet and patch panels.

B. Category 6 UTP, 4 Pair

1. The high performance Category 6 UTP cable shall be of the traditional round design with mylar separator tape between pairs.

2. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 N EC for use as a plenum or non-plenum cable. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL Listed type CMP (plenum) or type CM/G (non- plenum).

C. All Category 6 high performance cables shall mee t or exceed the following:

1. Electrical Characteristics:

Mutual Capacitance 56 nF/m at 1kHz
Characteristic Impedance (± 3%) of 100 Ohms 1-550 MHz
DC Resistance Max 7.61 Ohms/100m)
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 10

Positive ACR To 400 MHz-km

2. Physical specifications:

Non – Plenum Plenum
Conductor size 23AWG 23AWG
Diameter <.25” nominal <.24” nominal
Operating temperature -4 F to 140 F -4 F to 140 F
D. Product Specification: Commscope Uniprise Ultra Media Category 6 (7504/75N4 or AMP Netconnect Category 6 (219560-x/219567-x) 4 pair UT P cable.

2.04 MODULAR PATCH PANEL SYSTEM
A. The termination block shall support the appropri ate emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, potentially 1.2 Gbps ATM and 2.4 Gbps ATM, Multi-Tasked Split Screen Computing, Virtual Holographic Video Confere ncing, Instant Access Telemedicine, 3D CAD/CAM Engineering, and Internet-Intranet Communications/ Commerce, as well as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analog broad band video, and facilitate cross connection and inter connection using modular patch cords.

B. All Modular jack panels shall be wired to ANSI/T IA/EIA 568-C using T568B wiring.

C. The wiring block shall be able to accommodate 23 AWG cable conductors.

D. The Category 6 modular jack panels shall meet or exceed the Category 6 standards requirements in ISO/IEC 11801 and ANSI/TIA/EIA and shall be UL Listed.

E. A 110 IDC termination block shall provide for th e termination of horizontal, equipment, or tie cables.

F. Product Specification: Uniprise (UNP610-xxP) Cat 6 patch panel or AMP (137501x-x) Category 6 SL series path panel.

2.05 CATEGORY 6 – PATCH/STATION CORDS
A. Provide Category 6 Modular Patch/Station cords f or each assigned port on the patch panel and for each outlet in the station locations. All cords shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C Standard, Horizontal Cabling Sec tion. Cords shall be equipped with an 8 pin modular connector on each end and shall conform to the length(s) specified. All cords shall be wired to T568B standards. All cords shall be factory-built by the cabling manufacturer with a molded boot at both ends. Fabrication of cords in the field is prohibited.

B. All patch cords shall exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA and IS O/IEC Category 6/Class E specifications.

Patch cords shall be available in stranded or solid conductor in lengths to 50 feet.

C. The patch cord shall have built-in exclusion fea tures to prevent accidental polarity reversals and split pairs.

D. UL Verified for ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C Electrical Pe rformance E. Miscellaneous:

1. UL Listed for Fire Safety

2. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

3. FCC Compliant
F. Quantities: Shown on drawings.

G. Product Specification: Uniprise (UNC6-xx-xF) Ca tegory 6 modular patch cord or AMP Category 6 patch cable assemblies (2198xx-x).

2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLING
A. Fiber optic cabling shall be provided between fa cilities and furnished with the quantity of fibers as designated on the contract drawings.

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 11

B. All fiber in a cable run shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be the same type. A mix of fibers from different manufacturers may not be used.

C. Multimode Fiber Specifications:

1. All fiber optic cables within the premises shall use multimode, graded-index fibers with 50 micron cores only.

2. Fibers must comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 492 specifi cations and ISO/IEC 11801 standards.

3. Fibers will have dual wavelength capability, tra nsmitting at 850 and 1300nm ranges.

4. Shall be designed to support 10Gb/s applications for 300 meters.

5. Specifications Outside Plant Cables:
a. Maximum attenuation @ 850/1300 nm 3.0/1.0 dB/km. The core shall be filled with a water-blocking compound and be suitable for underground conduit, direct burial or aerial applications.

6. Product Specification: Uniprise Multimode LazrCO RE 300 or AMP XG 10G 50/125 micron fiber optic cable.

Core 50±2.5 µm
Performance Laser optimized 10 Gigabit to 300
meters
Core/Cladding Concentricity Error: <3.0 µm
Numerical Aperture: 0.200 ± 0.015
Cladding diameter: 125 µm ± 1 µm
Cladding Non-Circularity: ≤1.0%
Minimum Tensile Strength: 100,000 psi
Fiber Minimum Bending Radius: .75 in. (1.91 cm)
Cable Minimum Bending Radius:

During Installation:

After Installation:

20 times cable diameter
10 times cable diameter
Operating Temp. Range: 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C )
Storage Temp. Range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C)
Minimum Bandwidth: 2000 MHz at 850 NM
500 MHz at 1300 NM

7. Sheath Construction:
a. Outside Plant Cables: Systimax Single mode Loose -tube Dielectric Sheath Cables with buffer/fan-out kits as required. Equal by Berk-Tek or Corning b. Building Cables: Riser rated – armored jacket.

8. Product Specification: Comscope Uniprise or AMP.

2.07 FIBER PATCH CORDS
A. Fiber patch Cords shall be available in either S inglemode or Multimode.

B. Construction shall be either 3.0 mm cordage or 1 .6 mm cordage C. Connectors shall be available in Duplex LC.

D. Use only factory manufactured patch cords. Fiel d terminated patch cords are not acceptable.

E. Quantities: See drawings.

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 12

F. Product Specification: Uniprise or AMP.

2.08 FIBER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (FDC)/FIBER PATCH PA NEL A. Fiber Patch Panels - Combination Shelf: The Com bination Shelf is a wall or frame mounted unit that terminates, provides cross connection, interconnection, splicing and fiber identification for up to 48 fibers. The shelf will provide protection from mechanical stress on the cable and fibers and from macro-bending losses.

1. The shelf shall be wall or rack mountable depend ing on the location requirement. The units must fit into a 19” wide frame arrangement and have a jumper routing trough.

2. When wall mounted the shelf shall consist of a m odular enclosure with front access and can be fully administered from the front. When rack mounted the shelf shall consist of a modular enclosure with front and rear access and can be fully administered from the front and rear. The unit shall slide out to allow access from the top. Include splice organizers and fiber breakout kits as required.

3. The shelf shall have a translucent, removable co ver over the connector panels. The connector panels shall snap into the front of the shelf and accommodate ST, SC, or LC connectors as required.

4. Miscellaneous:
a. UL Listed for Fire Safety
b. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

5. Product Specification: Uniprise RFE-FXD, RFE-FX G; AMP 1U, 2U, 3U, 4U rack mounted enclosures.

2.09 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. Fiber Optic Connector Cassettes: All fiber optic cable shall be factory terminated 12-strand MPO type connectors or fusion spliced on each end. Provide 12-fiber factory terminated cassettes with either MPO type connection or splice pigtails.

1. The connector must:
a. Be capable of mounting on either 0.9 mm buffered fiber or on 3.0-mm cordage. b. Meet EIA and IEC standards for repeatability.
c. Have a locking feature to the coupler and assure non-optical disconnect. d. Have an installed attenuation loss of less than .5dB. e. Miscellaneous:
1) UL Listed for Fire Safety
2) ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

2. Product Specification: Uniprise LC; AMP LC

2.10 COPPER CABLING
A. Outside Plant Copper Cables

1. All voice grade wire and cable placed in the out side environment shall be solid, twisted pair, and multi-conductor. The copper twisted pairs shall have a mutual capacitance at 1kHz of 15.7 nF/1,000 ft. The cable shall be resistant to mechanical damage, lightning or damage from wildlife.

2. The aerial air core cable shall be a self-suppor ting or lashed cable consisting of plastic- insulated solid conductors covered by a plastic core wrap and surrounded by an inner polyethylene jacket, a corrugated aluminum shield, a corrugated steel wrap and a bonded polyethylene jacket (PASP).

3. The buried or underground cable shall have an al uminum steel polyethylene (ASP) sheath and a core of solid-copper conductors, dual insulated with foam skin and plastic, surrounded by FLEXGEL III filling compound.

B. The multi-pair copper cables shall meet the foll owing specifications:

1. Physical Specifications:

Gauge 24 AWG
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 13

Pair Size 25 to 1,800

1. Electrical Specifications:

DC Resistance 27.3 Ω /1000 ft (8.96 Ω /100m),
maximum
Mutual Capacitance
(@ 1kHz)

15.7 nF/1000 ft (5.15 nF/100m) (25
pair), maximum
Impedance 100 Ω (25 pair)

Buried/Underground Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]):
at 772 kHz 5.6 (25 pair), maximum
at 1.0 MHz 6.4 (25 pair), maximum

Aerial Cable Attenuation (dB/1,000 ft [305m]):
at 772 kHz 5.9 (25 pair), maximum
at 1.0 MHz 6.7 (25 pair), maximum

2. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer: Systimax or lis ted equal a. Buried/Underground: CSI ANMW
b. Aerial: CSI BKMP (self support), CSI BKMA (lashe d), CSI BKMH (lashed)

3. Copper Riser Cables: Shielded or unshielded 24 A WG multi-pair copper cables shall be used as the vertical riser cables. The cable shall support voice, data and building service applications. The bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables shall be observed during handling and installation. The multi-pair copper cables shall be in plenum or riser rated form and placed in conduit as required.

C. Shielded: The shielded cable, 200 pair or more, shall consist of solid-copper conductors insulated with expanded polyethylene covered by a P VC skin, be conformance tested to meet ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C for Category 3 cables, be UL and Listed as CMR. The core shall be overlaid with a corrugated aluminum sheath, which is adhesively bonded to an outer jacket of PVC plastic to form an ALVYN sheath. The copper riser cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical specifications listed below:

1. Electrical Specifications:

Average DC Resistance 26.5 Ω /1,000 ft (8.7 Ω /100m),
maximum
Average DC Resistance
Unbalance

1.7%, maximum
Mutual Capacitance @
1kHz
16 nF/1000 ft (5.25 nF/100 m),
maximum
Capacitance Unbalance
(pair to ground)
201pF/1,000 ft (65.94 pF/100m)
maximum

2. Attenuation (dB/100 m [328 ft.]:

Frequency Attenuation (Max.)

1.00 MHz 2.3 dB

4.00 MHz 4.9 dB
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 14

10.00 MHz 8.5 dB

16.00 MHz 12 dB

3. Worst Pair Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) dB/100 m [3 28 ft]:

Pair-To-Pair
NEXT (Max.) 1.0 MHz 13.8 dB

4.0 MHz 11.2 dB

10.0 MHz 10.2 dB

16.0 MHz 9.2 dB

4. The PVC sheath shall have improved frictional pr operties, allowing it to be pulled through conduit without the use of lubricants.

5. The cable shall be available in 25, 50, 100, 150 , 200, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, and 1800 pair counts.

6. Miscellaneous:
a. UL Listed for Fire Safety
b. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

7. Product Specification: ARMM type cable or listed equal.

D. Non-shielded: The non-shielded non-plenum cable shall consist of 24-AWG solid-copper conductors insulated with color coded PVC, 25 pair cable shall be UL Verified to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C for Category 5E, 25 or 50 pair shall be conformance tested to meet ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C for Category 5E cables. The non-shielded cable shall be available in 25 and 50 pair.

1. Miscellaneous:
a. UL Listed for Fire Safety
b. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

2. Product Specification: Commscope or AMP.

2.11 VOICE CIRCUIT TERMINATIONS IN THE TELECOMMUNIC ATIONS CLOSETS A. The wiring block shall be 66-type and support Ca tegory 3, 5e and 6 applications and facilitate cross connection and interconnection using either c ross connect wire or the appropriate category patch cords.

1. The wiring blocks shall be fire retardant, molde d plastic consisting of horizontal index strips for terminating 25 pairs of conductors each. These index strips shall be marked with five colors on the high teeth, separating the tip and ring of each pair, to establish pair location. A series of fanning strips shall be located on each side of the block for dressing the cable pairs terminated on the adjacent index strips.

2. The wiring blocks shall accommodate 22- through 26-AWG conductors and shall be able to mount directly on wall surfaces either with or without backboards or on a free-standing frame (Homaco # 50M-5400LH or equal).

3. Clear label holders with the appropriate colored inserts shall be provided with the wiring blocks. The insert labels shall contain vertical lines spaced on the basis of circuit size (3-, 4-, or 5-pair) and shall not interfere with running, tracing or removing jumper wire/patch cords.

4. The wiring blocks shall be available in 50 and 1 00 pair sizes. The 100 pair wiring blocks LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 15

shall be available with or without legs. The legs allow the cables to pass behind the wiring block and fan out to each side. The space created by the feet, on each side of the block, allows it to be used as a vertical jumper trough. The 50 pair size is not available with legs and shall be utilized for low pair count and/or depth restrictive situations.

5. The wiring block shall be able to accommodate ov er 500 repeated insertions without incurring permanent deformation and it shall pass the reliability test of no more than one contact failure in 10,000 connections.

6. Product Specification: Siemon Part # S66M1-50
B. Voice MDF/BDF/IDF Rooms, or as otherwise indicat ed on drawings, locations shall be equipped with termination blocks for termination of voice station and host cable pairs. Voice cable blocks shall consist of a minimum 100 pair. All blocks shall be securely fastened to the room backboards or equipment racks – see drawings. Provide all required D-rings, Flextray or other approved cable guides as required to provide a neat installation. All cables shall terminate in numerical sequence.

2.12 OTHER CABLING
A. Door controllers shall use RS485 cabling. RS-485 shall be a 2-pair, 24 AWG tinned copper individually shielded pairs, RS-485 low-capacitance communication, instrumentation, and special application plenum rated cable.

1. Readers shall use a plenum composite cable speci fication for access control use. a. Door Contact wire shall have minimum 1 pair 22 g auge 1) Lock power wire shall have minimum 1 pair 18 gau ge
b. REX wire shall have minimum 2 pair 22 gauge
c. OSDP readers shall use RS-485 cabling, 4 conduct or twisted pair over-all shielded and UL listed, Belden 82841/89841 or equal. OSDP r ated RS485 cable shall be enclosed within the bundle
d. General input devices shall be wired with 22 gau ge 4 conductor plenum rated cable.

2. Panic buttons, duress alarms and door release bu ttons shall have a 2-conductor stranded 22 gauge unsulated cable.

3. Emergency First Responder Radio DAS
a. Uplink Cable (BDA to Outdoor Antennas): minimum of 1/2" Foam Heliax, Copper- clad aluminum conductor, outdoor-rated, 50 ohm Coa x Cable- transition to riser or plenum-rated cable within the building as-required. b. Downlink Cable (BDA to Indoor Antennas): minimu m of 1/2" Corrugated Aluminum, Air dielectric, 50 ohm Coax.

2.13 GROUNDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS
A. The SCS Contractor shall utilize a Telecommunica tions Bonding Backbone (TBB) as provided by the Electrical contractor. The SCS contractor shall provide and terminate TBB cable(s) on ground bars located at each MDF/BDF/IDF Room, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.

All communication system bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA. Horizontal cables shall be grounded in compl iance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements and practices. Horizontal equipment including cross connect frames, patch panels, cable trays, equipment racks, ladder trays, conduits, active telecommunication equipment, sleeves and test apparatus and equipment shall be bonded to the TBB ground bars utilizing a #6-AWG and two hole compression grounding lugs. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing an approved ground at all newly installed distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, cable sheaths, circuit protectors, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework.

2.14 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. When shown on drawings, communication closets sh all be equipped with floor mounted equipment racks provided by the SCS Contractor to p rovide termination bays for the multiple LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 16

cable types in addition to shelves, panels, power strips, etc. The racks shall be made of lightweight aluminum and include mounting hardware for mounting specified termination equipment to the frame. In addition, the mounting hardware must provide vertical and horizontal wireways for cross connect wire.

B. Equipment racks, ladder trays and rack mount acc essories shall be Black in color unless otherwise noted.

C. Racks shall be mounted on an isolation pad and u tilize non-conductive washers to secure the rack to the floor. Floor mounted open racks shall be secured from the bottom rail to prevent movement. All racks shall be individually grounded to the isolated ground bar within the equipment room using a standard ground lug and #6 j acketed green cable. Daisy chaining a ground wire between racks is not allowed. Racks mounted on raised floors shall be seismically braced to the structural floor below the raised floor to the satisfaction of the Local Authority having Jurisdiction and all local, state and federal requirements.

D. Product Specification: Chatsworth or listed equa l.

2.15 TERMINAL BACKBOARDS
A. Where indicated on drawings, provide new plywood terminal backboards. Use Douglas Fir Plywood, exterior grade, finished one side and prime coat painted on all surfaces with a finish coat of fire retardant intumescent white enamel. On each plywood sheet leave one (1) Fire Marshal Stamp unpainted for inspection. Unless otherwise indicated, use 8’-0” high x length as shown on drawings x 3/4" thick plywood. See backbo ard elevations for more information.

2.16 UNSPECIFIED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Any item of equipment or material not specifical ly addressed on the drawings or in this document and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall be provided in a level of quality consistent with other specified items.

2.17 FIRE RATED PATHWAY
A. The firewall through-penetration shall be a manu factured, UL Classified, firestop device/ system designed to allow cables to penetrate fire-rated walls with a built-in fire sealing system that automatically adjusts to the amount of cables installed.

B. The firestopping device shall be capable of inst allation in new construction or retrofit in existing structures.

C. The device shall be UL Tested and Classified in accordance with ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and with ratings up to and including 2 hours.

D. Manufacturer: Specified Technologies Inc., EZ-Pa th® or equal by Wiremold.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION
A. The structured cabling system shall consist of a ny or all of the following subsystems:

1. Work Area Subsystem

2. Horizontal Subsystem

3. Administration Subsystem

4. Backbone Subsystem

5. Support Subsystem
B. Work Area Subsystem: The Work Area Subsystem pro vides the connection between the information outlet and the station equipment in the work area. The Work Area Subsystem includes:

1. Adapters

2. Faceplates
C. Horizontal Subsystem: The Horizontal Subsystem p rovides connections from the horizontal cross connect to the information outlets (IOs) in the work areas. It consists of the horizontal LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 17

transmission media, the associated connecting hardw are terminating this media, and IOs in the work area. The Horizontal Subsystem encompasses th e active channel (See section on Testing). Each floor of a building shall be served by its own Horizontal Subsystem. The Horizontal Subsystem includes:

1. Horizontal Cabling

2. Jacks

3. Patch Panels

4. Patch Cords

5. Station Cords
D. Administration Subsystem: The Administration Su bsystem links all of the subsystems together.

It consists of labels, diagrams, drawings, manuals, and tools necessary to manage the Structured Cabling System after installation. The Administration Subsystem includes:

1. Labels

2. As-built drawings

3. Operations manuals

4. Record drawings

5. Test results

6. Warranty documents
E. Backbone Subsystem: The main cable route within a building is called the Backbone Subsystem. It links the main cross connect (MDF) in the equipment room to intermediate cross connects (IC) in the BDFs and/or IDFs. It consists of the backbone transmission media between these locations and the associated connecting hardware terminating this media. It is normally installed in a star topology with first-level backbone cables beginning at the main cross connect. If needed, a second-level backbone cables begin at intermediate cross connects.

F. A Backbone Subsystem in a single building will c onsist of a single MDF connected to one or more IDFs on a single floor or on multiple floors. The backbone will also connect the MDF to a Main Point of Entry (MPOE) which houses the incomin g telecommunications services for the building.

G. A Backbone Subsystem in a multi-building campus will consist of a single MDF connected to more than one BDF (one per building). Each BDF will be connected to the IDFs of each respective building. The MDF will also connect to the campus MPOE. Additional MPOEs may connect to the campus backbone through the BDFs.

H. The Backbone Subsystem includes:

1. OSP/Riser/Plenum rated fiber optic cable

2. 25-pair to 2400-pair OSP/Riser/Plenum rated copp er cable

3. OSP/Riser/Plenum rated coax cable

4. Patch panels

5. Wall and rack mounted termination fields

6. Patch cables

7. Cross-connect wire
I. Support Subsystem: The Support Subsystem consist s of hardware and equipment required to facilitate and sustain the Structured Cabling System. The Support Subsystem includes the cabling pathways, cabinets, and racks that hold the structured cabling in place. The Support Subsystem includes:

1. Cable tray

2. Ladder Rack

3. Fire Stop systems

4. Conduit

5. Data Equipment Racks

6. Cabinets

7. Vertical and Horizontal Wire Managers
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 18

8. Backboards

3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The wiring of the system shall be executed in ac cordance with the drawings and the equipment manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Should any variations in these requirements occur, the contractor shall notify the Owner’s Project Manager before making any changes. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer-authorized insta ller of the approved equipment to install the equipment and guarantee the system to operate as pe r plans and specifications.

B. All materials shall be new. No used or re-manuf actured parts or components shall be accepted.

C. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the NEC Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes. All copper cabling shall bear UL listed type CMP (Plenum Rated) and/or CM/G (General Purpose) and/or CMR (Riser Rated). All fiber optic cabling shall bear OFNP (Plenum Rated) and/or OFNR (Riser Rated) and/or OFN/G (General Purpose). The contractor is responsible for installing appropriately rated cable for the environment in which it is installed.

D. Cable Storage: The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay and the prior written approval of Owner’s Project Manager.

E. All installation shall be done in conformance wi th ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C standards and manufacturers installation guidelines. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines will require the Contractor to provide, in a timely fashion, any additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation to the satisfaction and written approval of the Owner’s Project Manager. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation.

F. The system must meet all local and other prevail ing codes.

G. All cabling installations shall be performed by qualified technicians. The labor employed by the contractor shall be regularly employed in the installation and repair of communication systems and shall be acceptable to the Owner’s Project Mana ger to engage in the installation and service of this system.

H. Special Equipment and Tools: In order to ensure the least amount of cable untwisting, it is required that all cables shall be stripped using a cable manufacturer’s recognized special tool.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or tools necessary to properly complete the System. This may include, but is not limited to, tools for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for copper/fiber cables, communication devices, jack stands for cable reels, or cable winches.

I. Under no circumstance are "channel locks" or oth er pliers to be used.

J. The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pull ing tension shall not be exceeded.

K. No cable is to be pulled through a conduit “L-be nd” (condulets).

L. Conduit runs shall not exceed 100 feet or contai n more than two 90 degree bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull boxes. Pull boxes are not to be used in lieu of a bend. It is the contractor’s responsibility to report any unusable or inadequate conduit runs to the owner prior to pulling any cable.

M. Reinstate all pull-wires in conduits and ducts a fter use to facilitate future addition of cables.

N. Cable raceways and conduits shall not be filled greater than the BISCI recommended fill for the particular raceway or conduit size.

O. The use of lubricants (i.e. Yellow 77, Polywater ) to facilitate the installation of cables in conduits is highly discouraged. If such a lubricant must be used, the contractor shall use a lubricant specifically designed for the environment and type of cable being installed. (E.G. the use of LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 19

outside plant, low temperature cable lubricants shall not be acceptable in an indoor plenum environment.) Under no circumstances shall cable pulling lubricant be allowed to accumulate on walls, floors, backboards, or other surfaces outside the conduit.

P. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended insta llation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor before final acceptance at no cost to the Owner.

Q. Each station cable shall have 1 meter of service slack configured in an “S” shape via J-hooks at rack or wall field end and 2 meters of service loop at station outlet end. Service slack shall be located within 15’ of the MDF/BDF/IDF as required to maintain a neat and “workmanship like” installation.

R. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration subsystem to the information outlet shall not exceed 295-ft (90 m).

S. Each run of cable between the termination block and the information outlet shall be continuous without any joints or splices.

T. All station cable shall be placed in the interio r of walls unless otherwise noted or obstructed.

U. Provide bushings, grommets and strain-relief for cables terminating at wall-mounted outlets and patch panels to ensure durable and robust connectio ns. The bushings and grommets are intended to protect the cables from any sharp edges that present a risk to the cables. Ensure that all sharp edges are covered to protect the cables from damage.

V. All cable bundles exiting floor or wall penetrat ions and running into furniture or casework shall be wrapped in spiral wrap or split-loom tubing to protect the cabling and provide a neat installation.

W. Power Separation: The Contractor shall not plac e any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus. At no point shall the communications cables be tied to power cables or other building services. Station cables and tie cables installed within ceiling spaces shall be routed through these spaces at right angles to electrical power circuits.

X. Avoid electromagnetic interference (EMI) by main taining adequate physical separation between telecommunications cabling and possible sources such as, but not limited to, electric motors, electric pencil sharpeners, transformers, fluorescent lights that share distribution space with telecommunications cabling, copiers that share work area space with line cords and terminals, large fax machines and power cords that supports su ch equipment.

Y. All cable or innerduct shall run parallel or at right angles to building wall structures.

Z. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas wher e duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, cable bundles shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the building structure and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals. Minimum 1” wide J-hooks shall be appropriately sized to allow a minimum of 50% spare capacity for future cable installation. The contractor shall include all costs in base bid for any additional supports/seismic bracing required by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction.

AA. The Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 48 o r less, station or other cabling with half inch hook and loop strips tight enough to hold the bundle tog ether in a cylindrical shape, but not so tight as to deform the cable geometry. It shall be possible to completely rotate all cable ties around all cable bundles. Plenum rated hook and loop ties will be used in all plenum areas. In areas where 2 or more bundles are traveling in close proximity, utilize a Chatsworth Rapidtrak Cable support system.

BB. Cables or J hooks shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid.

CC. Cables or J hooks shall not be attached to or s upported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.

DD. Where additional conduit(s)/sleeve(s) are requi red, but not provided by the electrical contractor, LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 20

the SCS cabling contractor shall be responsible to provide such conduit(s)/sleeve(s). Conduit(s) and sleeve(s) shall be of suitable material, sized, installed, fire-stopped, and grounded as required by the NEC, ANSI/TIA/EIA standards and all other applicable codes and standards.

Any conduit(s) and sleeve(s) added by the SCS contr actor shall be approved by the Owner’s Project Manager prior to rough-in.

EE. In the event Contractor is required to remove c eiling tiles, such work shall not break or disturb grid. Removal of the ceiling grid must be coordinated with the Owner’s Project Manager. All insulation shall be replaced in its original location.

FF. Cabling and Termination Identifications: A num bering and marking scheme must be used to identify all cable and cabling terminations. All cables, regardless of length, shall be marked and/or numbered at both ends. Marking codes and me thodologies shall correspond to the instructions in this specification.

GG. Ensure that all waste materials are disposed of in a safe manner. Pay particular attention to waste materials produced during the termination of optical fiber cabling. Ensure that all used components and fiber cut-offs are collected in purpose-made containers and disposed of properly. The contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish created in the course of this project. The contractor shall thoroughly clean all buildings of any dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., caused by the performance of this work.

HH. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: All equipment ra cks and cabinets shall be bolted to the floor by the contractor in the location shown on drawings.

II. Ladder tray mounting brackets shall be screwed to studs or to the properly mounted plywood wall field, not to drywall.

JJ. Seismic Requirements: Contractor will install all equipment racks, equipment cabinet enclosures, cable runways, etc. according to the local, state and/or federal code. Contractor will notify Owner’s Project Manager of such require ments and shall provide such bracing as required.

KK. Miscellaneous Equipment: The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, distribution rings, wire molding (MC/MDF & TC/IDF locations), miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation of the System.

LL. The cables within the rack or cabinets shall be numbered for identification.

MM. Cable bundles within the MDF/BDF/IDF shall be dressed into bundles of no more than 48 cables. Maintain each bundle with half inch, hook and loop strips every 18 inches. On completion of installation, neatly run and re-tie all cable bundles in the Closet.

NN. The contractor shall thoroughly clean all equip ment and materials. All exposed parts of the equipment, cabinets, and other equipment shall be left in a clean condition, unblemished and free of all dirt, dust, smudges, spots, fingerprints, etc.

OO. The contractor shall install all patch cords as required per drawings and specifications at the direction of the Owner’s project manager in a neat and systematic fashion. Prior to installing all patch cords, the contractor shall install patch cords in a single rack to demonstrate work practices to the Owner’s project manager. Only after any corrections/modification to the installation as directed by the Owner’s project manager, may the contractor continue installing the patch cords in the remaining racks.

PP. Conduits: All backbone cabling will run throug h dedicated conduits. All new conduits will be supplied with a pull string. Existing conduits shall be proven to be clear prior to pulling of cables. Contractor shall supply pull string and pull rope for the installation of all cables in existing conduits. For all conduits left with available capacity, Contractor shall replace pull strings with ¼-inch pull rope during the course of his work. Contractor must seal all conduits with an approved sealing compound.

QQ. Use purpose-built pulling grips during cable installation. Do not pull cables by attaching pull wires to cable jackets, elements or reinforcement. The cable pulling tension shall be applied LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 21

smoothly without jerks. Use strain gauges or equivalent measures to ensure that the maximum manufacturer recommended tensile load rating of the cables is not exceeded during installation.

RR. The number of cables in each conduit shall be c ontrolled to allow for future cable installation and to stay within the manufacturers maximum allowa ble cable pulling tension. Conduit fill ratios shall not exceed the current requirements of the NEC.

SS. Provide expansion plugs in all ducts/conduits e ntering the building. Seal all unused ducts/conduits with plugs that allow the pull-string to be tied off on the inside.

TT. All cabling shall be splice free unless otherwi se noted on drawings.

UU. The Contractor shall be responsible for providi ng an approved ground at all distribution frames.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework. All grounds shall consist of #6 AWG copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground. All cable sheaths and splice cases shall be grounded to a Telecommunications Ground Bus. Grounding must be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA, ANSI-J-STD-607-A and all local codes and practices. Bond all metallic sheath communications cables entering the building per manufacturer specifications and NEC 770-33, 800-33 and 800-

40. VV. Each equipment cabinet and rack requires its ow n dedicated grounding connection to the grounding infrastructure. Grounding infrastructure can consist of either an “aisle ground” conductor placed at the ladder tray above each rack /cabinet, or by providing every rack/cabinet with its own dedicated #6 AWG (min.) green conductor back to the TMGB/TGB. All ground conductor attachments to the TMGB/TGB shall utilize 2-hole compression lugs.

WW. In raised-floor environments, the ground conduc tor shall attach to the lowest holes on the front rail of each rack/cabinet.

XX. Attachment to every rack and cabinet shall be m ade by one of the following methods:

1. Direct connection to the rack- Attach ground con ductor’s 2-hole compression lug to the front rail’s top holes of the rack/cabinet using either two (2) tri-lobular thread-forming screws (self-tapping or sheet metal screws produce metal shavings and are not acceptable) or by using two (2) standard bolts with two (2) “Type B” internal-external tooth lock washers per bolt. If thread-forming screws are not used, remove paint at the connection point and use an approved anti-oxidant prior to attaching the ground conductor.

2. Rack ground bus- Install a dedicated copper grou nd strip at the top of the rear rail. Attach ground conductor’s 2-hole compression lug to this ground strip using either tri-lobular thread-forming screws (self-tapping or sheet metal screws produce metal shavings and are not acceptable) or by using two (2) standard bolts with two (2) “Type B” internal- external tooth lock washers per bolt.

YY. Rack mounted equipment shall be grounded via th e chassis, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. The equipment chassis shall be bonded to the rack/cabinet using one of the following methods:

1. If the equipment has a separate grounding hole o r stud, use a #6AWG ground wire from the chassis ground hole/stud to the rack grounding bus.

2. If the manufacturer suggests grounding via the c hassis mounting flanges, use tri-lobular thread-forming screws (not self-tapping or sheet metal screws) to attach the equipment to the rack/cabinet rails. If the equipment mounting flanges are painted, remove the paint and apply an anti-oxidant, or use tri-lobular thread-forming screws and two (2) “Type B” internal-external tooth lock washers to safely ground equipment to the rack.

ZZ. Bonding of ladder tray sections- Attach bonding straps to each ladder tray section by utilizing either two (2) tri-lobular thread-forming screws (not self-tapping or sheet metal screws) or by using two (2) standard bolts with two (2) “Type B” internal-external tooth lock washers per bolt.

If thread-forming screws are not used, remove paint at each connection point and use an LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 22

approved anti-oxidant prior to attaching the bonding strap.

3.03 PENETRATIONS OF WALLS FLOORS AND CEILINGS
A. Unless specifically shown on the drawings, the C ontractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior written approval of the Owner’s Project Manager.

B. Any penetrations through acoustical walls or oth er walls for cable pathways shall be sleeved by the Contractor. Sleeves shall consist of metallic conduit deburred and grommetted on both ends, with flanges or other means to prevent the sleeve from slipping or falling out of the partition. Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 6” on both sides of the partition. Outside perimeter of sleeves shall be sealed against sound, air, heat, or as required by partition design.

Inside of sleeve shall be sealed similarly after installation of all cabling. Cables shall be independently supported on either side of the sleeve. Sleeves shall not be used as cable supports. Additional requirements in compliance with applicable code shall apply.

C. Replace all moisture and fire barrier material i n ducts, conduits and other penetrations disturbed during installation of communications cab ling.

D. Any penetrations through fire-rated walls for ca ble pathways / cables shall be sealed by use of a non-permanent fire blanket or other method in compliance with the current edition of NFPA and the NEC or other prevailing code and must be an approved UL Listed system. The contractor must not use concrete or other non-removable substance for fire stopping on cable trays, wireways or conduits. Contractors who use this method will be required to replace all cables affected and provide the original specified access to each effected area. This requirement also applies to maintaining fire ratings of all floors penetrated by conduits or devices designated for use by voice and data cablin g.

E. Sealing of openings between floors or through ra ted walls, whether existing or created by the contractor for placement of cable shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Sealing material and application shall be an approved UL Listed syst em and shall be accomplished in such a manner that is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Any openings created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work.

1. Firestopping work shall be performed by a single contractor to maintain consistency and accountability on the project.

2. The Contractor shall install penetration firesto p seal materials in accordance with design requirements, and manufacturer’s instructions.

3. The Contractor’s installer shall be certified, l icensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements.

4. All installed through penetration firestops shal l be identified via label, or stencil. Label shall state that the fill material around the penetrating item is a firestop, and that it shall not be disturbed unless by an authorized contractor. The label shall include the firestop brand name, and the classified system number for which it was installed. a. Sample Label:
1) MANUFACTURER’S NAME:
2) ATTENTION
3) Fire Rated Assembly
4) For Any Changes To This System, Please Refer To UL System Listed Below 5) PRODUCT:
6) HOUR RATING:
7) UL SYSTEM:
8) INSTALLATION DATE:
9) INSTALLED BY:
10) LICENSE NUMBER:

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 23

11) PHONE:
12) FAX:

3.04 LABELING REQUIREMENTS
A. Labeling: The Contractor shall be responsible f or printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution frames, and outlet locations, according to the specifications. No labels are to be written by hand.

B. Numbers must be assigned to each outlet location using a logical designation convention.

Blueprints with the outlet placement and configuration information have been furnished to the Contractor. Contractor will provide the equipment as necessary to generate Panduit PAN- CODE (or Equal) laser printer generated self-laminating labels using the numbering convention shown below and as specified herein. Before any permanent labels are installed on blocks, face plates or cables, a sample label of each various type listed below must be submitted to Owner’s Project Manager for written approval to ensure compliance with the labeling scheme, legibility, etc.

C. Station Faceplate Labeling. The following is il lustrative of the number convention to be used:

1. Example: 21.001
a. 21: IDF location where cable originates (i.e., IDF room “#2-1”). b. 001: Station Number
D. Station Outlet Labeling. The following is illus trative of the number convention to be used:

1. Example: DATA A
a. Data A 1st Data Jack
b. Example: Voice 1
c. Voice 1 1st Voice Jack
E. Station Cable Jacket Labeling. All station cabl es (Voice and Data) will be labeled within six inches of each termination end (e.g., at both ends, outlet end and BDF/IDF end) using “P- Touch” type, self-laminating cable markers.

1. Example: 21.001A
a. 21: IDF location where cable originates (i.e., IDF room “#1”). b. 001: Station Number
c. A: Cable Identification (“A” for data cable #1, “B” for data cable #2, and “V” for the voice cable.)
F. Riser Cable Labeling. All riser cables will be labeled to reflect the origin and destination abbreviation for the cable and pair counts on large font (16 pitch) self-laminating labels, which shall be located within 18 inches of each end of the cable. Labels shall be placed on the cable to be visible without relocating surrounding cables.

1. Example #1: IDF22/IDF31/CP100/01
a. IDF22: Cable Origination
b. DF31: Cable Destination
c. CP100: Cable Type & Pair or Strand Count (ex. 1 00 – pair Copper Cable. Other possibilities include HB for hybrid fiber cable, MM for multimode cable, and SM for singlemode cable.)
d. 01: Cable identification number (ex. cable 01, there may be more than one copper riser cable with the same origin, destination and pair count) G. Voice Station Cable Termination Block Labels. A ll voice station cables will be labeled using appropriate terminal-block label strip with label holders.

1. Example: 001
a. 001: Station Number
H. Voice Riser Cable Termination Block Labels. All voice riser blocks shall be labeled using appropriate terminal-block label strip with label holders and shall follow Station Outlet Faceplate Labeling scheme outlined above. Building interconnect voice cable termination block labels LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 24

shall be per ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

I. Patch Panel Labels, Horizontal. All patch panel s will be labeled using self-laminating laser patch panel label markers.

1. Example: 001A
a. 001: Station Number
b. A: Cable Identification (“A” for data cable #1, “B” for data cable #2)

2. Data cable #1 shall be terminated adjacent to da ta cable #2 moving left to right and top to bottom.

3. Fiber Patch Panel Labels. All fiber patch panels will be labeled using self-laminating laser patch panel label markers. The scheme shall indicat e destination of connected cables on the patch panel followed by a slash (/), origination of connected cables on the patch panel followed by a slash (/), and the port number adjacent to the port a. Example: MDF/IDF2/01
1) MDF: Destination Patch Panel Location Designati on
2) IDF22: Origination Patch Panel Location Designa tion 3) 01: Indicates port number on both origin and de stination patch panels.

J. Equipment Rack Labeling: All equipment racks sh all be labeled according to their room identifier and a two-digit number. The labels will be engraved plastic plates, with 1”-high white letters on black background. The labels will be attached to the crossmember at the top front of each frame or rack with appropriately-sized sheet metal screws. Self-adhesive strips, glues, etc. are unacceptable.

1. Example: MDF-01
a. MDF: Room Designation
b. 01: Rack Identifier
K. Tube Cable and Fiber Cable Warning Labeling. Th e Contractor shall provide and install tags of stamped plastic for tube cable and innerduct. The labeling convention described above within Paragraph H shall apply. Additionally, the Contractor will also install fiber optic warning tags (Osburn Associates Part Number F04002) every eight feet on all exposed fiber optic cable as well as on innerduct containing fiber optic cable installed within the building.

L. MDF/BDF/IDF Floor Plan Mounting Frame: Provide wall mountable floor plan mounting frame with removable Plexiglas front cover in each MDF/BDF/IDF. Frame and cover shall be sized to house 30”x42” floor plan drawing. Coordinate location of frame with Owner’s Project Manager prior to installation.

3.05 TESTING/WARRANTY
A. The testing is to show that there are no errors, damaged or incorrectly installed components, that the installation is correctly labeled and that all the installed components meet or exceed the criteria detailed in these specifications. Any test that does not show that a component is satisfactorily installed, as per these specifications, shall be repeated. If a test procedure needs to be modified to satisfactorily test some components, the modification shall be submitted for approval of the Owner’s Project Manger prior to the tests being conducted.

B. All outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to testing. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work.

C. Provide the Owners' Project Manager with the opp ortunity to witness all testing. On reasonable request, the installer shall demonstrate that the test procedure competently identifies the fault conditions being tested for.

D. Complete all of the tests identified in these sp ecifications.

E. Ensure that all test equipment is in calibration before delivery to site and throughout the testing period. The Installer shall be responsible for ensuring that any necessary tests and rework to maintain equipment's calibration status is carried out. Any tests performed on uncalibrated test LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 25

equipment shall be repeated at the Installer’s cost.

F. The test documentation shall be available for in spection by the Owners' Project Manager during the installation period and copies shall be submitted to the Owners' Project Manager within fourteen days of completion of tests on cables in each area. The Installer shall retain a copy to aid preparation of Record Documents information. S ee Records Documents details under submittals section.

G. If on submittal of the Record documentation ther e are any missing test results or incorrectly named files, the test shall be repeated at the Installer’s expense.

H. The Contractor shall provide competent, factory- trained engineers and/or technicians, authorized by the manufacturer of the cabling system, to technically supervise and participate during all tests for the systems. Personnel shall be competent in and qualified by experience or training for comprehensive TDR and OTDR operation a nd troubleshooting, for both copper and optical fiber testing.

I. The Contractor shall test and certify the cablin g system to minimum standards as set forth in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C specifications for 100BaseTX Ethernet and for Category 6E cable, token ring, and 1000baseT signals.

J. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100 % tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall be verified usable by the contractor before system acceptance. Any defect in the cable system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed-through couplers, patch panels, splices, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed.

K. Each cable shall be tested for continuity on all pairs and/or conductors. Twisted-pair voice cables shall be tested for continuity, pair reversals, shorts, transpositions, presence of A.C. voltage and opens using a “green light” type test set. Twisted-pair horizontal cables shall be tested for the all of the above requirements, plus tests that indicate installed cable performance.

These cables shall be tested using a 568-B.2-2 Leve l III / IEC 61935 Level III or better ETL certified cable tester/analyzer.

L. Each installed cable shall be tested for install ed length using a Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) device. The cables shall be tested from patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch panel to outlet or block to outlet as appropriate. The cable length shall conform to the maximum distances set forth in the ANSI/TIA/EIA -568-C Standard. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing the cable identification number and circuit or pair number. For multi-pair cables, the shortest pair length shall be recorded as the length for the cable.

M. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the pro blem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be collocated in the binder. Correction of all damaged cables shall include replacing damaged cables with new cables in complete runs, replacing damaged connectors or remaking poor terminations. In-line cable joints, splices or distribution points will not be acceptable except where specified in this document. All damaged cables shall be removed from site.

N. Manufacturer Warranty: Contractor shall provide a twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this cabling syst em per Submittals Section and Records Document.

O. Enhanced Category 6 data cable shall be performa nce verified using an automated test set.

This test set shall be capable of testing for the continuity and length parameters defined above, and provide results for the following tests:

P. Attenuation (Insertion Loss).

1. Return Loss (RL).

2. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) – measured at both end s of each cable pair.

3. Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR).

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 26

4. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT).

5. Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (PSACR) .

6. Far End Crosstalk (FEXT).

7. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT).

8. Power Sum Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (PSELFEX T).

Q. Optical Fiber Cable Testing: All fiber testing s hall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system. There shall be no splices unless otherwise shown on drawings or in this specification. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-61 & ANSI/TIA/EIA 526 and a bi-dir ectional end to end power meter test performed per ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1300 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers.

1. Graphical printouts shall be taken of OTDR tests for each element. These printouts shall be stapled or otherwise attached to 11" x 8.5" size sheets. They shall be printed at an appropriate scale, such as 0.5 dB per division for the attenuation axis. Provide diskette copies of the OTDR traces to the owner on completion of the testing. Provide a copy of the emulation software and the appropriate license to the client.

2. Pre-installation cable testing: The Contractor s hall test all fiber cable prior to the installation of the cable. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective during the warranty period.

3. Loss Budget: Fiber links shall have a maximum lo ss of: (allowable cable loss per km)*(km of fiber in link) + (.4dB)*(number of connectors) = maximum allowable loss.

4. Any link not meeting the requirements of the sta ndard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to Owner.

3.06 MISCELLANEOUS PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Single Point of Contact: Contractor will provide an English proficient, single point of contact, i.e., Project Manager, to speak for the Contractor and to provide the following functions:

1. Initiate and coordinate tasks with Owner’s Proje ct Manager, and others as specified by Owner’s Project Manager.

2. Provide day-to-day direction and on-site supervi sion of Contractor personnel.

3. Ensure conformance with all Contract provisions.

4. Participate in weekly site project meetings.

5. This individual will remain as Project Manager f or the duration of the project. The Contractor may change Project Managers only with the Owner’s Project Manager’s written approval.

B. Planning meetings and schedule: Within thirty (3 0) calendar days after the date of award of the Contract, an initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to clarify all requirements (systems, services, distribution methods, etc.), identify responsibilities, and schedule the events that will transpire during the implementation of the project. Within one (1) week of this initial meeting, the contractor shall provide a written report and project schedule to clearly document the events and responsibilities associated with the project.

C. Site Cleaning: Throughout the progress of the p lant construction, the contractor shall keep the working area free from debris of all types and remove from the premises all rubbish resulting from any work done by Contractor. On a daily basis and at the completion of its work, the Contractor shall, to the extent possible, leave the premises in a clean and finished condition.

D. Safety Requirements: Contractor will utilize ap propriate personnel and display warning signs, signals, flags and/or barricades at the work site to ensure adherence to safety regulations and as prudence requires.

E. Specification/Drawing Status: All specification s and drawings related to this project will be “frozen” after shop drawing approval. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate any future changes with the Contractor at any time.

F. Upon approval of shop drawings, Contractor shall immediately place orders for all required LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 27

materials, components, and supplies. In addition, Contractor shall secure and forward written confirmations (including orders and shipping dates) direct from each manufacturer/vendor to the Owner’s Project Manager.

G. Contractor shall expedite shipment of all materi als, components and supplies, as necessary to ensure the successful completion of the Project by the date required. All costs for expediting shall be included within Contractor’s pricing as provided below.

H. The system/network cost herein shall include adm inistration/ maintenance training for at least ten Owner’s representatives with a minimum allotment of sixteen hours. All training shall include written and/or video materials that shall remain the property of Owner. If materials are written, they shall be provided in quantities sufficient for each person trained; if materials are video, one copy of each will be required. The administration/maintenance training shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Review of as-built documentation, including a si te demonstration.

2. All warranty information.

I. Minimum standards for maintenance purposes shall include optional access to service on a 24 hour-a-day, 365 day-a-year basis. In addition, Contractor shall, upon notification, respond as follows:

1. Emergency Response: Contractor must respond by u tilizing remote diagnostics capabilities (as applicable) within thirty minutes of notification. If necessary, Contractor must dispatch at least one certified technician for arrival on-site within two hours of notification.

2. Non-Emergency Response: Contractor shall respon d by utilizing remote diagnostics capabilities and or cause dispatch of at least one certified technician for arrival on-site within one business day of notification.

3. Definition of “Emergency”: For maintenance purp oses, “emergency” shall be defined as one or more of the following conditions:
a. Defects of any riser pairs and/or components inv olving at least ten percent (10%) of any riser cable’s capacity.
b. Defects of station cable pairs and/or components involving at least ten percent (10%) of any department or group of voice and/or data stations. c. Defects significantly impairing any single atten dant console. d. Defects of any fiber optic cable and/or componen ts involving at least ten percent (10%) of any department’s or group’s fiber-based sy stems and/or stations. e. Any pre-defined failure as submitted by Owner an d agreed to be Contractor.

3.07 DAMAGES
A. The Contractor will be held responsible for any and all damages to portions of the building caused by it, its employees or subcontractors; including but not limited to:

1. Damage to any portion of the building caused by the movement of tools, materials or equipment.

2. Damage to any component of the construction of s paces.

3. Damage to the electrical distribution system.

4. Damage to the electrical, mechanical and/or life safety or other systems caused by inappropriate operation or connections made by the Contractor or other actions of Contractor.

5. Damage to the materials, tools and / or equipmen t of the Owner, its consultants, agents and tenants.

3.08 INSPECTIONS
A. On-going inspections shall be performed during c onstruction by the Owner’s Project Manager.

All work shall be performed in a high quality manner and the overall appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly. The following points will be examined and must be satisfactorily complied with:

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 28

1. Are all cables properly labeled, from end-to-end ?

2. Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications for the specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC and/or DC voltage?

3. Have the pathway guidelines been followed? Are all cable penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code?

4. Have the Contractors avoided excessive cable ben ding?

5. Is Cable Fill Correct?

6. Are hanging supports within 1.5 meters (5 feet)?

7. Does hanging cable exhibit some sag?

8. Are telecommunications closet terminations compa tible with applications equipment?

9. Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?
a. Jacket removal point?
b. Termination positions?
c. All pair terminations tight with minimal pair di stortions? d. Twists maintained up to Index Strip?

10. Have Modular Panel instructions been followed?
a. Cable dressing first?
b. Jackets remain up to the Connecting Block?
c. All pair terminations tight and undistorted?
d. Twists maintained up to the Connecting Block?

11. Are connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels or faceplates without cables wrapped or twisted around the Mounting Colla rs?

12. Are the correct outlet connectors used (T568A o r T568B)?

13. Is the jacket maintained right up to the termin ation?

14. Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?

3.09 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. At the completion of the System, the Contractor shall restore to its former condition, all aspects of the project site and on a daily basis, shall remove all waste and excess materials, rubbish debris, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services provided under this Contract.

All clean up, restoration, and removal noted above will be by the Contractor and at no cost to Owner. If the Contractor fails in its duties under this paragraph, Owner may upon notice to the Contractor perform the necessary clean up and deduct the costs thereof from any amounts due or to become due to the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove trash from the areas it is working in and bring trash and debris to the Contractor provided dumpster.

B. Final Punch Walk: The contractor and owner shal l complete a final inspection to determinate if all conditions of the scope of work are completed to the owner’s satisfaction. A “punch list” will be formulated within (2) days of the punch walk and be presented to the contractor for completion prior to final project sign-off by the owner. If an item is missed during the punch walk or not included on the “punch list” for any reason, it does not release the contractor from completing the scope of work as defined in the specification or drawings.

C. Contractor shall submit complete Record Document ation as outlined in submittals section prior to project sign-off by owner.

3.10 SYSTEM AND/OR NETWORK TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation, Contractor shal l execute all of the required tests as summarized in this specification. When all such tests have been completed to Owner’s satisfaction and Manufacturer’s specifications, Contractor shall give the Owner written notice thereof.

B. Contractor must assume responsibility of assurin g that the system and/or network installed operates properly, including any required coordination with other suppliers.

Structured Cabling System 27 10 00 - 29

END OF SECTION 27 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 1

SSEECCTTIIOONN 2277 4411 0000

AAUUDDIIOOVVIISSUUAALL SSYYSSTTEEMMSS SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS PPAARRTT 11 -- GGEENNEERRAALL

1.01 SCOPE
A. This specification shall apply to all phases of Work hereinafter specified, shown on Drawings, or as required to provide a complete installation of Audiovisual Systems for this Project. Work required under this specification, is not limited to just the Audiovisual Systems (AVS) - refer to Architectural, Electrical, Structural, Landscape, Structural Cabling and Mechanical/Plumbing Drawings, as well as all other drawings applicable to this project, which designate the scope of work to be accomplished. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications for the Contractor to finalize design, provide and install a complete, fully operational, and tested system

1. Work Included. Furnish labor, material, service s and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all AVS equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects functional system ready for use. a. Equipment and materials as indicated on the audi o-visual drawings b. Extension rings where required to provide a flus h mount surface for cover plate mounting on finished walls.
c. Engraved nameplates on the equipment rack and an y custom wall plates. d. Coordination of all millwork mounting of any AVS device with the Architect and millwork providers.
e. Include work not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation of the system or piece of equipment.
f. All conduits, device junction boxes, wall plates and floor boxes, not shown on the electrical drawings, but required to complete the audio-visual system installation. g. Installation of any specialty back boxes, includ ing display backboxes, and speaker rough-in kits with j-boxes and flexible conduit connections. h. Installation of all backing or structural suppor t for flat panel displays, projectors, projection screens, speakers, and other AVS equipment not shown elsewhere in these drawings and specification but required to complete the audio-visual system installation.
i. Seismic and safety wires where required.
j. Connection of AVS equipment to Fire Alarm shunt wiring as required to mute AV systems during fire alarm event.
k. Design, engineer and provide complete means of s upport, suspension, attachment and seismic restraint for all AVS equipment, including but not limited to, speakers, displays and projectors. (Hereinafter “support) of the Work of this Specification in accordance with local building codes and regulation s. Contractor shall obtain the services of an engineer licensed to perform this work within the State of Jurisdiction it is to be performed.

2. The AVS Contractor Work shall include installati on or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details, installation and rough-in locations from the actual equipment or from the equipment shop drawings.

B. Audiovisual Systems are diagrammatic, and are in tended to convey the scope of work, indicating intended general arrangement of equipment. Follow Drawings in laying out Work and verify spaces for installation of materials and equipment based on actual dimensions of equipment furnished.

C. All miscellaneous system components including, b ut not limited to, cables, speakers, signal converters, interface panels and components, termination equipment, patch panels, backboards, converters, digital matrix switchers, digital video extenders, controllers, digital signal processors, amplifiers, pre-amps, custom fac eplates, mounting hardware, fasteners, LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 2

racks, cabinets, and any other related items shall be furnished and installed complete under this section, such that the system shall perform all functions listed herein in compliance with all of the specified requirements.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design, manufacture, testing and method of insta llation of all apparatus and materials furnished under requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the following:

1. AES - Audio Engineering Society

2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

3. BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service Int ernational, Inc.

4. CEDIA - Custom Electronic Design and Installatio n Association

5. Digital Display Working Group

6. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance

7. FCC - Federal Communications Commission

8. HDMI Licensing, LLC

9. INFOCOMM - International Communications Industri es Association

10. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic E ngineers

11. ISO - International Organization for Standardiz ation

12. ITU -Telecommunication Standardization Sect

13. MPEG - Moving Picture Experts Group

14. NAB - National Association of Broadcasters

15. NEC - National Electrical Code

16. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Associ ation

17. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

18. NSCA - National Systems Contractors Association

19. CALOSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Admini stration

20. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Televisio n Engineers

21. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association

22. IBC - International Building Code

23. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

24. VESA - Video Electronics Standards Association

25. Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Publi shed Standards and Codes B. The contractor is required to obtain the latest revisions of these standards and provide the infrastructure which meets the most stringent implementation of these standards C. Perform Work in accordance with the National Ele ctrical Code, applicable building ordinances, and other applicable codes, hereinafter referred to as the "Code." The Contractor shall comply with the Code including local amendments and interpretations without added cost to the Owner.

Where Contract Documents exceed minimum requirement s, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved.

1. Comply with all requirements for permits, licens es, fees and codes. The Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, shall obtain all permits, licenses, fees, special service costs, inspections and arrangements required for Work under this contract, unless otherwise specified.

2. Comply with requirements of the applicable utili ty companies serving this Project. Make all arrangements with utility companies for proper coordination of Work.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Warranty: Furnish a written guarantee for a per iod of (1) one-year from date of acceptance.

Provide Phone Contact information for service personnel within twenty-four hours of call and for exchange of faulty equipment. This obligation is limited to exclude conditions of misuse.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 3

B. The one-year warranty also includes any software installed on the system. After AVS certification and acceptance, source code changes a nd/or additional programming, whether requested by the Owner or performed by the Installing Contractor, shall be warranted by the Installing Contractor for a period of one (1) year, with the Installing Contractor responsible for the diagnosis and repair.

C. The Contractor shall provide an annual “Software Maintenance” contract. This shall cover all software provided as part of this system and/or written for this system and shall include both routine upgrades to applications and operating systems, as well as any modifications to software that may be required by any of the AVS equ ipment provided on the project. The Software Maintenance contract shall commence immedi ately after expiration of the warranty period and continue for three (3) years.

D. Wherever a discrepancy in quantity of equipment, cable, devices, etc., (all materials), arises on the Drawing and/or Specifications, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for providing and installing all material and services required by the strictest condition noted on Drawings and/or in Specifications to ensure complete and operable systems as required by the Owner and Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall hold a valid State of Calif ornia C-7 Low-Voltage license, shall have completed at least 10 projects of equal scope, shall have been in business of furnishing and installing systems of this scope and magnitude for at least five years, and capable of being bonded to assure the owner of performance and satisfactory service during the guarantee period.

F. The contractor shall hold all other licenses req uired by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

G. All work shall be performed under the supervisio n of a company accredited by the AVS equipment manufacturer and such accreditation must be presented at the time of the bid.

H. The installing contractor shall be a factory aut horized installer and warrantee station for the brand of equipment offered at the time of the bid and shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment at time of bid. The installing contractor shall maintain a spare set of all major parts for the system at all times or have immediate access to replacement equipment.

I. All of the equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by Authorized Factory Installation technicians. The Contractor shall furnish a letter from the manufacturer of all major equipment, which certifies that the installing contractor is the Authorized Installer and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices. The Contractor shall also furnish a written guarantee from the manufacturer that they shall have a service representative assigned to this area for the life of the equipment.

J. All AV systems equipment supplied shall be liste d by Underwriters Laboratories or Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. A copy of the listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor’s submittal. Any equipment submitted that is not NRTL-listed shall be subjected to on-site testing by AHJ-approved agency at the Contractor’s sole cost. All expenses related to such testing, including any repairs or replacements caused by damage to the equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.

K. Personnel: Use adequate numbers of directly empl oyed skilled technicians and installers who are thoroughly trained and experienced with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the AV systems installation work specified herein. Use of temporary labor or sub-contracted labor shall not b e allowed unless explicitly allowed elsewhere in this specification.

1. Designated Project Engineer: Provide a designat ed Project Engineer in responsible charge of the Design, CAD, In-House testing and on the on-site commissioning of the Project during all phases of the work of this specification. The Project Engineer shall hold a current InfoComm CTS-D along with all applicable AV equipment manufacturer LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 4

certifications necessary to complete the work specified herein. The Project Engineer shall be the same individual through the execution of the work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the contro l of the Contractor intervene. All Certifications shall be held by the Project Engineer at the time of the bid and shall have at least five (5) years direct experience in similar work.

2. The Lead Technician shall have at least three (3 ) years direct experience in similar work.

The AV technician assigned to this project shall be fully trained, qualified and carry valid and current industry certifications regarding the installation, operation and testing of audiovisual systems. At least one lead technician shall hold a current InfoComm CTS-I, with all applicable AV equipment manufacturer certifications necessary to complete the work specified herein shall be assigned as Lead Tec hnician to the project. All Certifications shall be held by the Lead Technician at the time of bid.

3. Custom Control System Programmer: Provide at lea st one (1) full time programmer on staff, capable of on-site custom programming of the custom remote-control system specified herein. Control System Programmer to hold the following certifications:

InfoComm CTS-D, CTS-I or CTS along with Extron Cont rol Professional (ECP) Certification, and Extron AV Associate certifications, or Crestron Master Programmer, at least Silver Level., or equivalent Certification from AMX. A programming Sub-Contractor may be used as long as the Programmer has the certifications as listed above.

4. DSP Programming. The DSP Programmer shall be Qsy s Level II at the time of the bid.

5. Designated Project Manager: Provide a designated Project Manager in responsible charge of the fabrication shop and on the Project Site during all phases of installation and testing of the work of this specification. The Project Manager shall hold current InfoComm CTS-D, CTS-I or CTS, and Extron AV Associate certifications or applicable and equivalent Certifications for Crestron or AMX and shall be the same individual through the execution of the work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor intervene.

6. Commissioning Personnel shall have a current AQA V Certified Quality Technician (CQT) certification in good standing and shall be capable of performing AV commissioning tests during staging and final commissioning of the system according to the AV 9000: Quality Management System for the Audio-Visual Technology I ndustry.

L. All the equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Installer of the equipment with the most current software & firmware package available at the time of installation.

M. Software – Control System, DSP, and All Other Ap plicable Equipment

1. At the time of Owner Acceptance of the installat ion, all equipment shall include any and all updated software or hardware revisions including source code to allow the Owner to make alternations and modifications to AVS programming to include, but not limited to all custom programs for remote control system touch panels, control systems, Digital Signal Processors. The software developer shall retain intellectual property rights to the operation software. The Owner shall be granted a license in perpetuity for use. The following requirements shall apply:
a. A written release shall be given by the Installi ng Contractor for all control programming done by the Installing Contractor’s personnel or sub-contractors. The release shall acknowledge the Owner’s ownership and right to modify programming directly, or to have the or to have the programming modified by others on the Owner’s behalf.
b. No program resident in a control system shall be overwritten until a back-up of the resident program is made programming modified by ot hers on the University’s behalf. c. All source code changes must be fully documented .
d. At the completion of the project, (3) USB drives shall be supplied to the Owner with the written release that includes the program and source code for the system in an unencrypted format. All documentation, not residing in the code in Adobe PDF and LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 5

Microsoft Office format.

N. Verifying Drawings and Job Conditions:

1. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and S pecifications in a manner to be fully cognizant of all work required under this Section.

2. This Contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where existing conditions differ from Drawings, adjustment(s) shall be made and allowances included for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.04 WORK IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Examine the Drawings and Specifications and dete rmine the work to be performed by the Architectural structural cabling, electrical, mechanical, structural, and other trades. Provide the type and amount of AVS materials and equipment nece ssary to place this work in proper operation, completely wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all additional conduits, boxes and other devices for the required operation sequence of all AVS equipment.

B. Low voltage conduit, boxes and power provided by division 16 or 26000 contractor.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver equipment until site conditions a re adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

B. On-Site Storage

1. The Contractor shall be responsible coordinate a nd maintain a secure storage space.

2. If this storage space is required to be on-site it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the size and spatial requirements with the Owner.

3. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the storage space and all contents, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner.

4. The Contractor shall examine the site and the Pr ogrammatic Documents and review with the Owner the designated areas of access, delivery, and storage for the Contractor's use.

The Contractor agrees that such areas are satisfactory and sufficient for their needs in the completion of their work and in conformance with the terms of this Contract.

C. Store materials indoors in ventilated areas with constant, but minimum, temperature of 60 degrees F and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.

D. Protection from Damage

1. The Contractor shall provide all protection nece ssary to safeguard their work from damage by their operations and the operations of others. Unless the Contractor proves to the Owner’s satisfaction that the Work has been damaged by others, the Contractor shall promptly repair, adjust, and clean all defective installations and bear all associated costs.

1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Drawings of Record:

1. The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date , a complete record set of drawings.

These shall be corrected daily and show every chang e from the original Drawings. This set of prints shall be kept on the job site and shall be used only as a record set. This shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout without written direction in each case. Upon completion of the work, a set of reproducible Contract Drawings shall be used to denote all chang es as noted on the record set of prints shall be incorporated thereon with black ink in a neat, legible, understandable and professional manner. Refer to the Supplementary Ge neral Conditions for complete requirements.

1.07 APPROVALS, EQUALS, SUBSTITUTIONS, ALTERNATIVES, NO KNOW EQUAL A. Approvals: Where the words (or similar terms) “ approved”, “approval”, “acceptable”, and “acceptance” are used, it shall be understood that acceptance by the Owner, Architect and LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 6

Engineer are required.

B. Equal: Where the words (or similar terms) “equal ”, “approved equal”, “equal to”, “or equal by”, “or equal” and “equivalent” are used, it shall be understood that these words are followed by the expression “in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.” For the purposes of specifying products, the above words shall indicate the same size, made of the same construction materials, manufactured with equivalent life expectancy, having the same aesthetic appearance/style (includes craftsmanship, physical attributes, color and finish), and the same performance.

C. Substitution: For the purposes of specifying pr oducts “substitution” shall refer to the submittal of a product not explicitly approved by the construction documents/specifications.

1. Substitutions of specified equipment shall be su bmitted and received by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to the bid date for review and written approval. Regulatory Agency approval for all substitutions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. To receive consideration, requests for substitutions must be accompanied by documentary proof of its equality with the specified material. Documentary proof shall be in letterform and identify the specified values/materials alongside proposed equal values/materials. In addition, catalog brochures and samples, if requested, must be included in the submittal. ONLY

PRE-BID APPROVED PRODUCTS, ISSUED VIA A FORMAL BID ADDENDUM TO ALL BIDDERS, WILL BE ALLOWED ON THE PROJECT. REGARDLES S OF THE

APPROVAL ON ANY SUBSTITUTION, ALL BIDS SHALL BE BAS ED ON THE PRODUCTS EXACTLY AS SPECIFIED. PRICING FOR EACH AP PROVED

SUBSTITUTION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID SUBMITTAL AS A SEPARATE LINE ITEM.

2. If the Contractor proposes to substitute the spe cified speaker system(s), the Contractor shall be responsible to provide the Owner & Enginee r with an AMFG Electronic and Acoustic System Evaluation and Response Analysis (EASERA) model depicting equal or better performance in both uniformity of direct field response and Speech Transmission Index (STI) as compared to the specified speaker sy stem.

3. In the event that written authorization is given for a substitution after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer quotations from suppliers/distributors of both the specified and proposed equal material for price comparison, as well as a verification of delivery dates that conform to the project schedule.

4. In the event of cost reduction, the Owner shall be credited with 100 percent of the reduction, arranged by Change Order.

5. The Contractor warrants that substitutions propo sed for specified items shall fully perform the functions required.

D. Alternates/Alternatives: For the purposes of spe cifying products, “alternatives/alternates” may be established to enable the Owner/Architect/Engineer to compare costs where alternative materials or methods might be used. An alternate price shall be submitted in addition to the base bid for consideration. If the alternate is deemed acceptable, written authorization will be issued.

E. No Known Equal: For the purposes of specifying products, “No Known Equal” shall mean that the Owner/Architect/Engineer is not aware of an equivalent product. The Contractor will need to submit a “Substitution” item, per the requirements listed above, if a different product is proposed to be utilized.

1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings/Submittals shall be submitted with in 20 working days of a notice to proceed, in digital sets accompanied by Letter of Transmittal, which shall give a list of the number and dates of the drawings submitted. Drawings shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets.

B. The Shop Drawings/Submittals submitted shall be marked with the name of the project, numbered consecutively and bear the approval of the Contractor as evidence that the LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 7

Contractor has checked the Drawings. Any Drawings submitted without this approval will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission.

C. If the shop drawings show variations from the re quirements of the Contract because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variations in the Contractor’s letter of transmittal. If the substitution is accepted, the Contractor shall be responsible for proper adjustment that may be caused by the substitution. Samples shall be submitted when requested.

D. Only products listed as “Equal” within the contr act documents, along with formally approved “Substitutions” will be reviewed. Products not conforming to these items will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal.

E. Review comments used in response to shop drawing s/submittals are:

1. “No Exception Taken” - Product approved as submi tted.

2. “Furnish as Corrected” - Re-submittal not requir ed, although the Contractor shall provide the submitted product with corrections as noted.

3. “Revise And Resubmit” - Re-submittal required wi th corrections as noted.

4. “Rejected” - Re-submittal required based upon th e originally specified product.

F. Shop drawings shall be submitted on the followin g but not limited to:

1. Audio, Video, and Control System diagrams.

2. Equipment Rack Elevations

3. AV Floor, Ceiling and Elevation Plans.

4. Control Panel & Touch Panel screen layouts

5. All other products called out on drawings that c all for shop drawing submittal.

1.09 MAINTENANCE, SERVICING, INSTRUCTION MANUALS AN D WIRING DIAGRAMS A. Prior to final acceptance of the job, the Contra ctor shall furnish to the Owner at least four (4) copies of operating and maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as four (4) complete AV System wiring diagrams for the following, but not limited to, items or equipment:

1. Audio, Video, and Control Systems.

2. Rack Elevations.

3. Touch panel layout pages

4. Programming source code.

B. All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the system supplied. Typical drawings nor consultant supplied drawings will not be accepted. Four (4) copies shall be presented to the Owner.

PPAARRTT 22 -- SSYYSSTTEEMM EEQQUUIIPPMMEENNTT SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials and Equipment: All AVS materials and e quipment, including custom-made equipment, shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and bear their label or be listed and certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NTRL) that is also recognized by the local Authority-Having-Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Frequency Coordination. Prior to ordering equipm ent, the Installing Contractor shall coordinate the frequencies of all wireless devices to prevent unwanted interaction between devices and rooms. This includes, but is not limited to, wireless microphones, assisted listening system devices, wireless control panels, etc. Verification of Frequency coordination shall take place with the use of a spectrum analyzer and frequency allocation/analysis software.

2.02 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS AND CAPABILITIES:

A. The AVS shall be utilized for to delivery of aud io from background music sources and inputs for other owner furnished Media sources at the AV Rack. The system shall have output connectors for ALS systems at the AV Rack. The system shall have the ability to accommodate 1 HDMI video/audio inputs, 12 anolag inputs, 8 analog outputs a s well as a 32 x 32 dante LAN port.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 8

The system can utilize/integrate, where needed; com puter, microphone, and other inputs for output to the Sound Reinforcement Systems. The vide o system shall be network based and allow for any source to be routed to any of the 2 displays. The AV system shall be controlled by a touch panel interface with control system process or. The control system shall be able to control all functions of the AV equipment, audio volume, audio source selection, choose display conent for all displays in the room, BGM/local input as well as volume level scheduling. See AV drawings for more detailed information regarding specific system functionality. There shall be sperate zones for level control and to bathrooms and fitness area. The system shall use pendant style speakers in the open areas and ceiling recessed mounted speakers in closed ceiling areas. The shall be pendant mounted subs placed as indicated on plans.

B. The AVS shall provide clear, natural sound unifo rmly distributed throughout the designated areas. The system shall utilize speakers as shown on the plans. These quantities shall be considered as the minimum quantity required.

C. The system shall have adequate dynamic range wit hout audible clipping or distortion to accommodate all types of program material. Audio, Digital Signal Processing shall be employed in the designated rooms to insure smooth frequency response, high acoustical gain before feedback. When at maximum level, the system shall o perate without audible distortion, rattles and buzzes. All switching shall be silent and without pops and or transients.

D. The system frequency response shall:

1. be within +/- 1.5 dB from a curve which is flat from 80Hz to 10kHz.

2. There shall be a minimum 12dB per octave roll-of f below 32 Hz.

3. Uniformity of coverage of the system at seated e ar height (42") shall be within +/- 1.5dB in the 4kHz 1/3 octave band at any seat location using pink noise as a test signal.

E. System noise shall not exceed an equivalent inpu t noise of -120dB based on a 20KHz-noise bandwidth. The predominant noise component in the system output under any operating condition shall be that of the input stage.

F. The sound level capability of program material l evels produced in all seats shall be at least 98 dB when measured with a scaled filter, set at “C Weighting”. There shall be at least 6dB of amplifier headroom.

G. The system shall provide clear audio to all area s covered by the system. See AVS drawings for exact location.

H. AVS network switch shall meet or exceed these s pecifications: Minimum Network Requirements Minimum network requirements must be m et for a successful installation.

Minimum requirements consist of the following: Netw ork switch: - 1-Gigabit port for every connected DM NVX endpoint - Nonblocking backplane - Layer 3 - IGMPv2 implementation.

Network switch settings: - IGMPv2 snooping enabled - IGMPv2 querier enabled - Fast-leave enabled (also known as immediate-leave). Inter-switch uplinks (if required): - The uplinks must have sufficient bandwidth for all encoders and decoders connected to the network switch.

Allocate 1 Gigabit per encoder or decoder connected to the switch. - Uplinks must be configured properly to support multicast traffic.

2.03 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING
A. General: Except when otherwise agreed in writin g the client shall retain legal and beneficial ownership of all Intellectual Property, including source code, created by the Contractor, their employees and sub-contractors.

B. The Contractor must allow sufficient time for th e programming of all software configurable audio, video and control systems. Contractors must evaluate the systems functional requirements and user interface and then allow time in their bid accordingly. The system description as well as the end user interview will provide the Contractor with the necessary information needed to proceed with the programming. Any questions as to the systems functional requirements must be sent in written RFI form to the Consultant. All programming schemes must be submitted to the Consultant for approval before programming starts. This LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 9

includes the appearance of all user interfaces, touch panel layouts, preset and sub-preset information (acquired through client interviews), and speaker control schemes. The Contractor shall also submit a narrative for the control system concept to the Consultant for approval. The Contractor is to interview the Owner and their representatives to acquire the necessary information needed to allow for the proper programming of this system. The Contractor, after interviewing the Owner, shall then submit a written report stating his interpretation of the client’s requirements for approval by Consultant. Only after the Client and Consultant have approved the programming report may the Contractor proceed w ith the programming of this system.

C. All equipment that is connected to the Client’s local area network and is configurable via the local area network must have its equipment software installed onto dedicated computers provided by the Client. The Contractor is to allot time to install and test equipment software onto a minimum of two of the Client’s computers which are to be identified by the Client and/or Consultant. The computers shall be programmed to em ulate user interfaces throughout the facility. The Contractor shall coordinate all software deployment over IP with the Client’s Information technology department.

D. A user-friendly/easy to use graphical interface programmed by the Contractor shall allow for easy operation of the system. This interface shall allow novice users the control of the system components without having to access the digital schematic diagram. These main system components shall include master volume control, zone volume control, room combining, routing, switching, source-equipment level control and any other control necessary for the system to function properly from a user standpoint.

E. Control system minimum programming outlined belo w:

1. The Contractor shall allot as many hours as requ ired for on-site control system programming with the Client’s representative.

2. The Control System in this project may connect t o the Client’s Local Area Network (LAN).

This connection will provide desktop computers control of the audio-visual system as well as make available remote troubleshooting via the internet and Extron Global Configurator Plus and/or Global Configurator Professional, or Crestron XPanel or Tablet. The Contractor shall provide time to install control system interface software on at least one desktop computer. Coordinate work with Client’s Information Services personnel.

3. Provide password protection to each control surf ace in this facility.

4. Touch panels shall be activated and deactivated by password. Upon start up a password dialog box shall be presented to the user to enter his/her password. Only after entering a password will the user have access to the system. The system shall be programmed to shut down automatically after being idle for a time to be specified by the user.

5. Touch panel layout design shall conform to the I nfoComm International “Dashboard for Controls” and programming guidelines. Touch panel designs are to be custom to this project. Re-purposed touch panel designs are not acceptable.

6. Control Help File: Each touch panel shall includ e a help file that will explain each layer of the touch-panel control scheme.

7. Control system shall utilize help desk software to provide:
a. Real-time monitoring of: Control system, Device monitoring, Projector lamp life, System online status, Room activity, Remote system diagnostics via Contractors help desk, Remote system control, Fault reporting via email alert, Logging of help request, User access control via password protection, Event logging, report and chart generation.

8. All serial controlled devices must have bi-direc tional communication with the control system. All control functions locally available on each device must be accessible via the remote-control system. All locally gestured control functions must mirror on the control system user interface. In other words, if a volume control is adjusted on a DSP interface that adjustment must register on the control interface.

9. Control system shall be used to power up and dow n connected equipment.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 10

F. Complexity of Programming:

1. It is required that the Contractor be experience d in the specified Control System. and shall have experience in Professional programming and pro gramming systems of this complexity. Contractors shall allow enough time in their bid to permit extensive programming of all software configurable audio, video and control systems to the requirements of the client and consultant. Contractor shall break out cost associated with programming of these systems for review by the Cons ultant. By submitting this bid, the Contractor agrees that they understand systems of this type and that all programming services are included to the satisfaction of the Consultant. The Contractor further agrees that they shall not make any claim for additional monies because of misinterpretation of programming requirements.

2.04 AUDIO VISUAL SCOPE OF WORK
A. To provide a design for a working audio system t hat delivers even coverage of quality back ground music to the areas of concern. The system can provide microphone and line level inputs.

There will be a touch panel controller for source selection for audio level control for the each separate space. There Will also a scheduler for automating music levels throughout the day. Any video source can be routed to any area. Any audio source can be routed to any of the spaces.

2.05 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM PRODUCTS
A. The system shall utilize AV products as shown on the Plans and listed below shall be unless otherwise specified. The products listed below shall be considered to be the minimum quantity, performance, functionality and quality levels. If additional and/or upgraded components are needed to meet the performance requirements of this final design-build specification, the contractor shall include all costs for such added and/or upgraded components in the base bid.

All AV network switches shall be compatible with AV over IP and Dante Protocols and requirements.

B. ADA-COMPLIANT ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM:

1. A complete system shall be furnished and install ed to meet the latest CBC 2013 and ADA 2010 requirements for hard-of-hearing for each system. Furnish portable receivers in as indicated in the table below. The Stationary Assistive Listening System shall be integrated into and work in conjunction with the sound reinforcement systems. Mount the necessary stationary transmitters into the equipment racks or a wall cabinet and adjust as required for total coverage of seating areas. A/V Contractor shall include all costs to tune transmitters and receivers to avoid interference with other RF devices including but not limited to other assistive listening devices and wireless microphones. Assistive Listening Transmitters shall operate in the 72 MHz and 216 MHz frequency ranges with +/- .005% stability accuracy. Transmitters and receivers shall be tunable to 57 channels. Stationary A/L Transmitters shall have a 1500 ft. range at 72 MHz and a 3000 ft. range at 216 MHz Portable A/L Transmitters shall have a range of 150 ft. If not already provided.

CBC 2013 Table of Receivers for Assistive Listening Systems Capacity of Seating
in
Assembly Area
Minimum Number of
Required Receivers
Minimum Number of
Required Receivers
Required to be
Hearing Aid
Compatible
50 or less 2 2
51 + 4% 25%
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 11

Note: 1. or fraction thereof.

2.06 GENERAL PRODUCTS FOR SYSTEMS OUTDOOR POOL.

A. See Drawings for Equipment Schedules.

B. Assisted Listening System

1. Transmitters: Listen LT-700-072 Qty: As Requir ed

2. Receivers: Listen LR500-072 Qty: As Requir ed

3. Lanyards: Listen LA-156-156 Qty: As Requir ed

4. Earphones: Listen LA-164 Qty: As Required

5. Chargers: Listen LA-164 Qty: As Required

2.07 CABLE – ALL SPACES
A. Speaker Cable, 70-Volt distribution, Plenum Rate d 2-Conductor, 14 AWG, unshielded pair:

Extron, West Penn, Belden or equal.

B. Loudspeaker Cable, Plenum Rated 2-Conductor, 12 AWG, unshielded pair: Extron, West Penn, Belden or equal.

C. Loudspeaker Cable, Plenum Rated 2-Conductor, 14 AWG, unshielded pair: Extron, West Penn, Belden or equal.

D. Analog Microphone/Line Level Installation Cable, 22 AWG conductor, jacketed, shielded, twisted-pair, Plenum Rated: Extron, West Penn, Beld en or equal.

E. Touch Panel and Dante Wall Plates: Plenum-rated Category 6A, Serial Digital Interface Cable RG6, 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable Belden 1794A or equal
F. Crestnet Cable, Crestron® certified for use in t he wiring of a Cresnet® control network.

Provides (1) 22 AWG shielded twisted pair for Cresnet control data, and (1) 18 AWG pair for 24VDC and Ground, within a single PVC jacket.

G. Provide plenum rated cable for all cable where r equired by code. Any cable changes or substitutions must be submitted and approved prior to installation. Non-compliant cable that has been installed without approval shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

PPAARRTT 33 -- EEXXEECCUUTTIIOONN

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION
A. The installation, configuration and wiring of th e system shall be executed in accordance with the drawings and the equipment manufacturer's insta llation instructions and guidelines. Should any variations in these requirements occur, the Contractor shall notify the architect before making any changes. It shall be the responsibility of the factory-authorized installer of the approved equipment to install the equipment and guarantee the system to operate as per plans and specifications.

B. Workmanship on the installed systems shall be of professional quality, best commercial practice and accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and standards of the particular industries involved.

C. Furnish all Additional conduits, AV Back-boxes, conductors, equipment plugs, terminal strips, etc., and labor to install a complete and operable system.

D. The cables within the rack or cabinets shall be carefully cabled and laced with Velcro wraps.

All cables shall be numbered for identification. Cables should have enough slack to allow removal of equipment for service without having to cut multiple Velcro ties or wire wraps. Power plugs need to be labeled at PDU.

E. Splices of conductors in underground pull boxes are not permitted.

F. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the NEC Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes. All copper cabling shall bear UL listed type CMP (Plenum Rated) and/or CM/G (General Purpose) and/or LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 12

CMR (Riser Rated). All fiber optic cabling shall bear OFNP (Plenum Rated) and/or OFNR (Riser Rated) and/or OFN/G (General Purpose). Cont ractor is responsible for installing appropriately rated cable for the environment in which it is installed.

G. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipm ent and materials. All exposed parts of the equipment, cabinets, and other equipment shall be left in a clean condition, unblemished and free of all dirt, dust, smudges, spots, fingerprints, etc., The Contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish occasioned by the work from the site. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all buildings of any dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., Caused by the performance of this work.

H. The Conduit System. Each conduit shall contain w ires or cables of the same signal level or the same type of circuitry only. Low Level Lines, medium level lines, video level lines, high level lines and data and control circuits should be run in their respective separate conduits.

I. Wiring and Cabling. During installation both en ds of all single wires or cables shall be marked with consecutive approved number markers, and a careful running log kept of route and terminations.

After attachment at terminations these markers shall be accessible and readable for identification.

A detailed wiring diagram shall be furnished with these numbers shown. At the operational level (i.e. Audio-Visual equipment receptacle boxes, etc.) all receptacles shall be clearly marked by function and number (when there are many of the same function). For example, where a given microphone line may appear at several locations, the same label shall show.

J. Power distribution cables shall not be installed adjacent to signal cables. Power distribution cabling shall be on the opposite sig of the equipme nt enclosure from signal cables and shall be uniformly located throughout the installation.

K. Wherever signal lines entering the equipment are as must be connected into the racks, the use of intermediate terminal strips shall be used. This shall also facilitate the testing of maximum increments of the systems in the Contractor's shop. UTP Cables shall terminate in a Patch Panel and / or Switch. All connections of lines at terminal strips, as well as at signal receptacles, shall be mechanically secured and then soldered. No unsoldered connections shall be permitted.

L. Where lines approach the racks and terminal stri ps they shall also be mechanically anchored at the rack, and provided with sufficient slack length to avoid strain, abrasion or wear. All cable entry shall be through the tops of racks or through entrance holes in the base of the rack. No cable shall enter racks through front, rear or side panel openings. For equipment mounted in drawers or on slides, the interconnecting cables shall be provided with a service loop of appropriate length. Cables shall not protrude from the back of racks. All system wire, after being cut and stripped, shall have the wire strands twisted back to their original lay and be terminated by approved soldered or mechanical means .

M. System Grounding.

1. The "spider" concept is designed to avoid ground loops and inductive coupling.

2. The systems shall be hum free, stable and free o f oscillation with the earth ground temporarily disconnected.

3. The earth ground shall be made at only one point in the system as indicated and shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association 70-2014.

4. The grounding method shall insure that the syste m is free of the following problems under any mode of operation:
a. RF oscillation, pickup and interference.
b. Distortion.
c. Crosstalk.
d. Signal Leakage.
e. Very high frequency feedback.
f. Audio Hum.

5. The equipment racks shall be isolated from, and not electrically connected to, the building grounding system. This means that the conduit system shall not be electrically connected to LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 13

the equipment racks and that the equipment racks shall be installed so that they are electrically isolated from the building structural steel. The racks shall be electrically connected at only one point to the isolated grounding system.

6. In order to ensure the least amount of cable un- twisting, it is required that all cables shall be stripped using a special tool.

7. The use of lubricants (i.e. Yellow 77) to facili tate the installation of cables in conduits is highly discouraged. If such a lubricant must be used, the Contractor shall verify the acceptability of the lubricant to be used with the cable manufacturer, prior to using such a lubricant.

8. Under no circumstance are "channel locks" or oth er pliers to be used.

9. Plenum rated cable may be run exposed above ceil ings, provided the cabling is supported independent of other utilities such as conduits, pipes, and the ceiling support systems. The cables shall not be laid directly on the ceiling panels. The use of cable ties shall be done in accordance with the cable manufacturer's requirements. The cable jacket composition must meet local and all other prevailing fire and safety codes.

N. Labeling

1. Wiring Labels: At all connection points for all types of cable & wiring, a label strip shall be attached indicating the name/number of that cable or wire as follows:
a. At internal locations (inside racks, cabinets, o r boxes), a pressure sensitive label shall be used.
b. At external locations, a printed label covered w ith clear shrink wrap or approved labeling system shall be used.

2. Equipment Labels: All active components shall ha ve labels at the front and rear. Labels shall be applied plumb and neat and shall not cover any equipment lights, recessed controls, or control labels.
a. Front labels shall indicate functional use of eq uipment. b. Rear labels shall indicate system schematic refe rence designation.

3.02 PERFORMANCE TESTS OF THE COMPLETE SYSTEM
A. Verify that all wiring is correctly and completely installed B. Verify that the entire system performance is in accordance with the design requirements.

C. All these tests, and any others that the Contractor may wish for his own satisfaction, shall have been performed and successfully achieved before observation is requested. The Owner’s representative may request repetition and demonstration during observation of certain of these tests or other critical tests if problems become apparent. If specifications are not met, further observations shall be at the Contractor's expense.

D. Sealing of openings between floors, into or thro ugh rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by the contractor for placement of new or removal of old cable into or through shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Sealing material (Approved UL listed system) and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner that is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between location s as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor's work. Any openings created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work.

E. Firestopping work shall be performed by a single contractor to maintain consistency and accountability on the project.

1. The Contractor shall install penetration firesto p seal materials in accordance with design requirements, and manufacturer’s instructions.

2. The Contractor’s installer shall be certified, l icensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements.

3. All installed through penetration firestops shal l be identified via label, or stencil. Label LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 14

shall state that the fill material around the penetrating item is a firestop, and that it shall not be disturbed unless by an authorized contractor. The label shall include the firestop brand name, and the classified system number for which it was installed.

4. Sample Label:
a. MANUFACTURER’S NAME
b. ATTENTION
c. Fire Rated Assembly
d. For Any Changes To This System, Please Refer To UL System Listed Below e. PRODUCT
f. HOUR RATING
g. UL SYSTEM
h. INSTALLATION DATE
i. INSTALLED BY
j. LICENSE NUMBER
k. PHONE
l. FAX
F. Equipment Rack and Equipment Testing and Adjusti ng Procedures: Conduct procedures in fabrication shop. Verify safe and proper operation of all components, devices, or equipment, establish nominal signal levels within the systems and verify the absence of extraneous or degrading signals. Make all preliminary adjustments and document the setting of all controls, parameters of all corrective networks, voltages at key system interconnection points, gains and losses, as applicable. Submit test report with color photographs of each equipment rack, front and back. Perform at least the following procedures:

G. Preliminary: Verify: Grounding of devices and e quipment. Integrity of signal and Audiovisual system ground connections. Proper provision of power to devices and equipment. Integrity of all insulation, shield terminations and connections.

H. Integrity of soldered connections. Absence of so lder splatter, solder bridges. Absence of debris of any kind, tools, etc. Routing and dressing of wire and cable.

1. All wiring, including polarity and continuity, i ncluding conformance with wire designations on running sheets, field and shop drawings.

2. Mechanical integrity of all support provisions.

I. All new equipment racks shall be bolted to the f loor/millwork by the Contractor once the Owner determines the exact location for new rack. Contractor to verify the original Middle Atlantic racks are bolted to floor and seismic bracing are installed to code. The earthquake mounting brackets for each rack kit shall be screwed to studs, not drywall. All equipment shall be serviceable in the racks final location – the need to unbolt racking equipment to access or service equipment is not acceptable
J. Cleaning

1. Clean each section or area of where the work was conducted after completion to permit immediate use of the area.

2. Remove and discard all refuse, rubbish, and debr is.

3. The Contractor shall ensure that all recyclable and environmentally hazardous waste materials are disposed properly.

4. Make good all existing structures, surfaces, and utilities affected by cutting, coring, mounting, drilling, or other new work.

5. Clean all furnished equipment of dust, dirt, fin gerprints, smudge, and other material prior to calling for a Substantial Performance of Work Review or Completion of Work Review.

3.03 PROTECTION
A. During the installation phase and up to the date of achieving Substantial Performance of Work, protect finished or unfinished work against damage or loss. In the event of such damage or loss, immediately replace or repair such work or equipment at no cost to the Owner.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 15

3.04 SPECIFIC SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The installer shall, upon completion of the syst em, orient all antennas, speakers, align all projectors, screens and displays, adjust all controls, etc., to provide a system operating at maximum capability. Submit block diagram and shop d rawing of equipment.

3.05 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstr ating in the presence of the owner's inspector that the all audio, digital video and control parameters are as stated in the factory data sheets.

Check all circuits and wiring to verify they are free of shorts and grounds.

1. EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS IN NEED OF ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR OR

REPLACEMENT AND DISCOVERED DURING SUCH TESTING, SHA LL BE

IMMEDIATELY ADJUSTED, REPAIRED OR REPLACED WITH ALL NEW EQUIPMENT AND THAT PART OF THE SYSTEM SHALL THEN BE RETESTED. ALL SUCH

REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR SHALL BE DONE AT NO ADDITIONA L COST TO THE OWNER.

3.06 SPECIFIC AUDIO TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish all laptops, software, equipment and per sonnel to conduct these tests in accordance with the performance specification requirements. ANSI and EIA Standards.

1. Audio testing and adjustment:

2. Adjust all audio levels. Measure and record abso lute impedance at 400 Hz and 1 kHz for each and every speaker line. Correct polarity of all speaker lines.

3. Each “leg” of every individual speaker line shal l be measured using a volt meter to ensure that there are no shorts to ground.

4. When the system is brought to full power, there shall be no hums, buzzes, rattles, or indication of any abnormal speaker noise.

5. Audio, check for continuity, polarity, cold sold er connections, shorts and opens

6. Controls: Adjust all controls to achieve the spe cified performance. Provide shaft-locks or covers for all level controls, as appropriate to prevent unauthorized gain changes.

Contractor shall confirm that all control system operations are properly programmed and repeatable.

7. Testing Report: Provide a letter/report document ing the results of these preliminary tests, including amplifier gain/level settings, DSP EQ filter settings, and AV equalization curves for review by the AV Design Consultant and Owner.

8. The Contractor is fully responsible align, progr am, and test the sound speaker system speakers where these occur, to the respective speaker manufacturer specifications as required to achieve required uniformity of coverage as specified herein.

9. Contractor shall and utilize provide the followi ng Calibrated Test Instruments as a minimum during commissioning and acceptance testing :

10. Sensitive AC voltmeter, -80dBu sensitivity or m ore, 20Hz -30KHz response, able to measure signal to noise ratio, THD, electrical levels within the system. Note that some systems require measurements up to 100 volts and ma y require an external pad.

11. Sound Pressure Level Meter, ANSI Type I with A and C weighting filters, fast or time averaged.

12. Audio Signal Generator, 20Hz-30kHz, sine wave, pink noise, and continuous sine wave sweep.

13. Amplified Loudspeaker 100 mm producing 60 dBa a t one meter, and 70 dBa at one meter, pink noise, sine wave, and speech files.

14. The ability to measure STI-PA (source analyzer) .

B. Test media with known levels (audio, video, etc. ): Cd’s, VS, DVD’s etc.

1. AD/DC multimeter.

2. Light meter, lux/foot-candles.
a. Outlet tester (to test power outlet wiring).

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 16

b. The ability to measure electrical power (watt me ter, clamp meter, etc.). c. Cable sets, cable assemblies, adapters as requir ed to sample and measure in-or-out of circuit as required.
d. Computer with Smaart v8 or Systune. Outboard Dua l Channel Preamplifier and Calibrated microphones. Earthworks M23 or equal.
e. All equalization shall be accomplished using FFT Transfer Function. No real time analysis methodology shall be allowed.
f. Verification of Frequency coordination shall tak e place with the use of a spectrum analyzer and frequency allocation/analysis software.
g. Testing Report: Provide a letter/report document ing the results of these preliminary tests, including amplifier gain/level settings, crossover filter settings, and AVS equalization curves for review by the AV Design Consultant.

3.07 SPECIFIC AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM NETWORK CABLING TE STING REQUIREMENTS A. Category 6A Cable Testing.

1. The Contractor shall provide competent, factory- trained engineers and/or technicians, authorized by the manufacturer of the cabling system, to technically supervise and participate during all tests for the systems.

2. The Contractor shall test and certify the cablin g system to minimum standards as set forth in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C specifications for Category 6A cable as appropriate

3. General Requirements – Category 6A.
a. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested for:
1) Wire Map
2) Length
3) Insertion Loss
4) NEXT Loss
5) PS NEXT Loss
6) ELFEXT Loss
7) PS ELFEXT Loss
8) Return Loss
9) Propagation Delay
10) Delay Skew in accordance with the field test sp ecifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C. This document will be referred to as the “TIA Cat 6A Standard.”
b. In addition to testing the “In-link” performance parameters detailed in 3.a above, Alien Crosstalk testing or “Between-link’ testing shall be carried out in accordance with Annex E of the TIA Cat 6A Standard. Alien crosstalk testing includes the PS ANEXT and PS AACR-F (Power sum alien attenuation-to -crosstalk ratio from the far end) performance parameters. The standards refer to the link-under-test for Alien Crosstalk as the disturbed link.
c. PS ANEXT and PS AACR-F shall meet or exceed the limits defined in Section 7.8 of the TIA Cat 6A Standard.

4. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shal l be tested from the Switch located in the equipment rack to all end points throughout the AV System for compliance with the “Permanent Link” performance specification as defin ed in the TIA Cat 6A Standard.

5. One hundred percent of the installed cabling lin ks must pass the requirements of the standards mentioned in 3.a above and as further detailed in Section B. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in the test results documentation in accordance with Section C below.

6. Trained technicians who have successfully attend ed an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. Appropriate training LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 17

programs include but are not limited to installation certification programs provided by BiCSi or the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals).

7. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with th e accuracy requirements for level IIIe field testers as defined in the TIA Cat 6A Standard. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table I.1 of Annex I of the TIA Cat 6A Standard. (Table I.1 in this TIA document also specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel configuration.)

8. The test plug shall fall within the values speci fied in test plug NEXT loss requirements of the TIA Cat 6A Standard.

9. The tester shall be within the calibration perio d recommended by the vendor in order to achieve the vendor-specified measurement accuracy.

10. The tester interface adapters must be of high q uality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. T he contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.

11. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-t est is determined by the results of the required individual tests (detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C). Any Fail or Fail* result yields a Fail for the link-under-test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the results for each individual test parameter must Pass or Pass*.

12. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is det ermined by comparing the measured values with the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks. To which extent '*' results shall determine approval or disapproval of the element under test shall be defined in the relevant detail specification, or agreed on as a part of a contractual specification.

13. Owner or owner’s representative shall be invite d to witness field testing. The representative shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase five business days before testing commences.

B. Category 6A – Performance Test Parameters: The test parameters for Cat 6A are defined in the TIA Cat 6A standard. The test of each link shall contain all of the following parameters as detailed below. In order to pass the test, all measurements (at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 500 MHz) must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the above- mentioned standard.

1. Wire Map: Shall report Pass if the wiring of ea ch wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present.

2. Length: The field tester shall be capable of me asuring length of all pairs of a basic link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for NVP (1).

The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters – 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the variation and uncertainty of NVP.

3. Insertion Loss (Attenuation): Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term “Attenuation” has been used to designate “Insertion Loss.” Insertion Loss shall be tested from 1 MHz through 500 MHz in maximum step size of 1 MHz. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 18

Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculatio n of the Attenuation-to-Crosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this frequency.

4. NEXT Loss: Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through 500 MHz. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value of NEXT (worst case). NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

Table 1 -- Maximum frequency step size as defined in
Frequency Range (MHz) Maximum Step size (MHz)
1 – 31.25 0.15

31.26 – 100 0.25
100 – 250 0.50
250 – 500 1.00

5. PSNEXT Loss: Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evalu ated and reported for each wire pair from both ends of the link under-test (a total of eight results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when all other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1 through 500 MHz and the step size may not exceed the maximum st ep size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

6. ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair: Pair-to-pair FEXT Lo ss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under-test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from 1 through 500 MHz and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as in Table 1. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 19

7. PSELFEXT Loss: Power Sum ELFEXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields eight wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 through 500 MHz in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1. Minimum test results documentation (summar y results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

8. Return Loss: Return Loss (RL) measures the tota l energy reflected on each wire pair.

Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair.

This parameter is also to be measured from 1 through 500 MHz in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1.

Minimum test results documentation (summary results ): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss.

These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

9. Propagation Delay: Propagation delay is the tim e required for the signal to travel from one of the link to the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value.

10. Delay Skew [as defined in the TIA Cat 6A Standa rd; Section 7.5] This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew value of zero. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay (the longest propagation delay). The report shall include the delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value.

11. PS ANEXT: Pair-to-pair Alien NEXT (ANEXT) cont ributions is measured by applying the stimulus signal at the near end to one wire pair of a disturbing link and measuring the coupled signal at the near end of a wire pair in a disturbed link. This process is repeated for every wire pair in a disturbing link. The PS ANEXT for each wire pair in a disturbed link is obtained by the power sum addition of all the pair-to-pair ANEXT results to that wire pair from all wire pairs in disturbing links. All the links that are bundles with the disturbed link need to be included as disturbing links. In addition, links that are terminated in adjacent positions in a patch panel or interconnect panel must also be included as disturbing links in this test.

12. Minimum test results documentation (summary res ults): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PS ANEXT.

These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

13. PS AACR-F: The pair-to-pair Alien Far End cros stalk (AFEXT) contributions is measured by applying the signal at the near end to one wire pair of a disturbing channel or permanent link and measuring the coupled signal at the far end of a wire pair in a disturbed channel or permanent link. This process is repeated for every wire pair in a disturbing link and for all links in close proximity. A normalization, which is dependent on the relative length of disturbing and disturbed link, is applied to each pair-to-pair alien FEXT measurement. Then the PS Alien Attenuation-to- Crosstalk Ratio from the Far end (PS AACR-F) for each wire pair in a disturbed channel or permanent link is obtained by the power sum addition of all the normalized pair-to-pair far end alien crosstalk results to that wire pair from all wire pairs in disturbing links in close proximity.

14. Minimum test results documentation (summary res ults): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PS AACR-F. if LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 20

the link or channel connects two patch panels (data center), these wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from both ends. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

C. Category 6/6A Test Result Documentation

1. The test results/measurements shall be transferr ed into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time.

2. The database for the completed job shall be stor ed and delivered on CD-ROM including the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.

3. A paper copy of the test results shall be provid ed that lists all the links that have been tested with the following summary information
a. The identification of the link in accordance wit h the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation
b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-und er-test including the NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) number
c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.

4. General Information to be provided in the electr onic data base with the test results information for each link:
a. The identification of the customer site as speci fied by the end-user b. The identification of the link in accordance wit h the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation
c. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-und er-test d. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results e. The cable type and the value of NVP used for len gth calculations f. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester g. The brand name, model and serial number of the t ester h. The identification of the tester interface
i. The revision of the tester software and the revi sion of the test standards database in the tester
j. The test results information must contain inform ation on each of the required test parameters that are listed in Section B and as further detailed below under paragraph C6.

5. In-link (In-Channel) detailed test results. The detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for must contain the following information:
a. For each of the frequency-dependent test paramet ers, the value measured at every frequency during the test is stored. The PC-resident database program must be able to process the stored results to display and print a color graph of the measured parameters. The PC-resident software must also provide a summary numeric format in which some critical information is provided numerically as defined by the summary results (minimum numeric test results documentation) as outlined above for each of the test parameters.
b. Length: Identify the wire-pair with the shortest electrical length, the value of the length rounded to the nearest 0.1 m and the test limit value c. Propagation delay: Identify the pair with the sh ortest propagation delay, the value measured in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit val ue
d. Delay Skew: Identify the pair with the largest v alue for delay skew, the value calculated in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit value e. Insertion Loss (Attenuation): Minimum test resul ts documentation as explained in Section B for the worst pair
f. Return Loss: Minimum test results documentation as explained in Section B for the worst pair as measured from each end of the link
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 21

g. NEXT, ELFEXT: Minimum test results documentation as explained in Section B for the worst pair combination as measured from each en d of the link h. PSNEXT and PSELFEXT: Minimum test results docume ntation as explained in Section B for the worst pair as measured from each end of the link D. Between-Link (Between-Channel) Test Results Data . A test report shall be provided for each disturbed link included in the Alien Crosstalk sample test. This test report must contain

1. PS ANEXT results at each frequency (See Table 1) for each wire pair in a victim link as well as the PS ANEXT results for the average of these four wire pairs. The worst case margin and the worst values shall be provided for each wire pair and the average of the four wire pairs. PSANEXT shall be measured and test ed from the end of the link or channel where all cables are terminated at a distribution panel. In case the cabling runs from panel to panel (data center), the PS ANEXT test results for each disturbed link shall be collected and saved from both ends (both panels) of the disturbed link.

2. PS AACR-F results at each frequency tested (See Table 1) for each wire pair in a disturbed link as well as the PS AACR-F results for the average of the four wire pairs. The worst case margin and the worst values shall be provided for each wire pair and the average of the four wire pairs. PS AACRF only needs to be measured and tested from one end of the link or channel. Connect the main DTX-18 00 unit (measurement of PS AACR-F disturbance) to the disturbed link or channel at the end where all cabling links are terminated at a distribution panel. Select End 1 in the AxTalk Analyzer Software.

E. Optical Fiber Cable Testing: All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system. There shall be no splices unless clearly defined in Section 3 of this specification. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-61 & ANSI/TIA/EIA 526 and a bi-dir ectional end to end power meter test performed per ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1300 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers.

1. Pre-installation cable testing: The Contractor s hall test all lightguide cable prior to the installation of the cable. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective during the warranty period.

2. Loss Budget: Fiber links shall have a maximum lo ss of: (allowable cable loss per km)(km of fiber in link) + (.4dB)(number of connectors) = maximum allowable loss.

3. Any link not meeting the requirements of the sta ndard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to Owner.

F. The Contractor shall provide test documentation to the Owner’s Project manager in a three ring binder(s) and CD format within three weeks after the completion of a specific project. The binder(s) shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with the words “Test Results”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The binder shall be divided by test type. Test data within each section shall be presented in the sequence listed in the administration records. The test equipment by name, manufacturer, model number, and last calibration date shall also be provided at the end of the document. Unless a more frequent calibration cycle is specified by the manufacturer, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test.

G. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the pro blem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be collocated in the binder.

3.08 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. After all requirements of the Specifications and /or the Drawings have been fully completed, representatives of the Owner will inspect the work. Contractor shall provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item or system to the full satisfaction of each representative.

B. Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after receipt of approval and recommendation of acceptance from each representati ve.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 22

C. Upon testing by Owner’s Representative (Consulta nt) any deficiencies shall be noted. If the deficiencies are not correctable at the time of testing, any retesting costs by the Consultant, including any travel and lodging expenses shall be borne solely by the Contractor.

3.09 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. Qualification for Acceptance: After completing p reliminary testing, the Contractor shall furnish the Construction Manager with the letter/report documenting the results of the preliminary tests and two (2) copies of "as-built" wiring diagrams of the entire system including the connection numbers, and their locations. The receipt of this documentation shall constitute the Contractor's acknowledgment that the installation is complete an d conforms to this specification and is ready to be reviewed and tested by the AV Design Consulta nt.

B. Acceptance Test: The Consultant, Owner's Represe ntative and/or Construction Manager will be present during the acceptance testing and require the assistance and cooperation of the Contractor. Provide personnel who participated in the actual installation and preliminary testing and adjustment of the audiovisual systems.

C. Equipment cabinet keys and any tamper-proof fast ener tools must be available to the AV Design Consultant. Delays associated with failure to access the equipment shall be back- charged to the Contractor at the AV Design Consultant's current hourly rates.

D. Each major component shall be demonstrated to fu nction, as specified.

E. The Contractor shall provide a laptop with all m anufacturer supplied configuration software necessary for communicating with DSP Audio Matrix M ixers, and the Modular Audiovisual Switchers. A review of system settings may be required for either of the programmable units at the AV Design Consultant’s request, and settings ma y be adjusted if necessary.

F. Such tests may be performed on any piece of equi pment or system. If any test shows the equipment or system is defective or does not comply with the specifications, the Contractor shall perform any remedies at his expense and pay the subsequent expenses of any retesting required.

G. Delays: If system acceptance is delayed because the system is found to not meet the specification requirements, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all consultant expenses related to re-testing. This shall include costs associated with travel to the site and any associated business travel expenses.

3.10 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION, TRAINING, AND FIELD SUPP ORT A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For each sys tem, provide three (3) copies of system manuals per system, two (2) for the Owner and one (1) for the AV Design Consultant. Manuals shall be in adequately sized three-ring binders, clearly labeled on spine. Manuals shall contain the following:

B. Service Reference Cover Sheet: Provide a cover s heet with Contractor name, address, Email, WEB Address, telephone and Fax numbers.

C. System Operation Instructions: Step-by-step oper ating instructions for the basic day-to-day use of the system including power activation, connection of source devices, adjustment of volume levels, selection of sources, etc. Include illustrations and references to individual equipment manuals as necessary.

D. Equipment Manuals: Include copies of individual equipment operation manuals separated by tabbed dividers. Order THE manuals in nominal signal path order (i.e. sources first, amplifiers/loudspeakers last), followed by control system manuals, followed by miscellaneous manuals.

E. Equipment List: List all system equipment includ ing, connectors and specialty hardware, by manufacturer and model and serial number.

1. As-built Drawings: Provide one set, reduced 11”x 17” foldout "as built" functional diagrams in clear plastic binder sleeves. Fold and insert drawings so that drawing title is clearly LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 23

visible at the front of the sleeve. In addition, provide 2 full-size drawing sets.

2. Provide software programmable device configurati on files to the Owner for all control system interfaces and computer-based files, and the DSP Audio Matrix Mixer. Store files on site in the system documentation binders in disk sleeves. Provide the files on USB.

3. Complete spreadsheet lists of IP network devices , protocols used, and IP and MAC Address lists and required ranges for coordination with the Owner's IT department.

F. Lists shall include information regarding locati on on the Owner's network or dedicated audiovisual physical subnet, VPN requirements, and other pertinent information for integration of IP networked audiovisual equipment into the Owner's Enterprise network G. Training: Provide hours as needed of system trai ning to operator(s) designated by the Owner.

Training time is to be non-contiguous, in multiple separate sessions. Training sessions are to be digitally recorded upon Owner request.

H. All training shall take place after the systems are operational, but before the acceptance tests.

I. Operational Training:

1. In the event the Installing Contractor does not have qualified instructors on staff for certain sophisticated equipment, the Installing Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner, shall provide a manufacturer’s representative for such instruction to the Owner.

J. Training Materials Supplied:

1. System operational manual (not equipment operati on manuals) that explains how to fully operate the system; from start-up to shut-down, and all operational steps in-between, in a step by step description, with pictures and other visuals to help convey information.

2. The Installing Contractor shall video record tra ining session(s) for Owners reference (to help limit minor follow up phone calls in the future).

K. Maintenance Training:

1. A session with Owner’s designated technical pers onnel for routine and preventive maintenance shall be given.
a. This training is for scheduled preventative main tenance for such items as filter and lens cleaning, minor equipment checks and “user” adjustments. 1) This training is not meant to teach Owner’s repr esentatives how to use commercial test equipment and/or do sophisticated e quipment/system alignment.

L. Training Materials Supplied:

1. Utilizing the equipment manuals and flow diagram s of the required in contract closeout submittals supply a listing with suggested preventative maintenance schedule of the system equipment.

2. Training Format
M. Presenter: The presenter of the training sessio ns to have been directly involved with the project and have intimate knowledge of the installed systems and its operation. The presenter to be experience operating similar systems of similar complexity.

N. Attendees: The End User to determine who shall attend Audio & Video Training. Group to be limited to 10 persons. Training to occur at building site and be coordinate with Owner’s Schedule and Calendar.

O. Classroom presentation: PowerPoint Presentation covering items indicated in syllabus.

Duration of classroom training not to exceed 4 hours.

P. Field Instruction: Hands On presentation cover ing items indicated in syllabus. Minimum duration of field instruction:

1. Video System Operation – 6 hours

2. Audio System Operation – 6 hours

3. One month follow up – 4 hours
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 24

Q. Audio Systems Training Syllabus
R. Section 1 - Introduction to Audio Systems

1. Decibels – Explain the concept of Decibels and i ts application in dBu and dBSPL. Provide references of each.

2. Frequency – Explain the concept of Frequencies a nd a relationship to octaves and musical notes.

3. Voltage – Provide description of microphone, lin e and speaker levels.

4. Gain Structure – Provide description and example of proper gain structure along with an explanation of clipping and headroom.

S. Section 2 – Introduction to Project Systems (Pro vide the following for each system in project)

1. Inputs – Present floor plans indicating location of technical panels with brief description of input connectors

2. Controls – Present floor plans indicating locati on of wall controls and mix locations.

3. Review the setup and adjustment of the output de vices.

4. Review the maintenance of the video equipment.

T. Section 3 – Microphone Selection and Application

1. Provide explanation of proper microphone selecti on to include:
a. Type of microphone: Boundary, Condenser, Dynamic , etc. b. Type of coverage: Omni, Cardioid, Semi Cardioid, etc.

U. Provide explanation of proper microphone applica tion to include:

1. General Handling and placement for handheld appl ications

2. General Handling and placement for stand applica tions

3. 3 to 1 rule with respect to interference

4. 3 dB rule with respect to headroom
V. Section 4 – Field Instruction

1. Mixing Console Operation

2. Explanation of signal path

3. Review of Aux sends

4. Review of Groups

5. Explanation of Mute Groups

6. Explanation of Matrix

7. Review of Main Section

8. Review of Metering

9. Tie Line Description
W. Section 3 – Field Instruction

1. Demonstrate the process of inputting media

2. Review the process or routing the signals throug h distribution

3. Review the setup and adjustment of the output de vices.

4. Review the maintenance of the video equipment.

X. Support Materials

1. Training Manuals - Provide three ring binders fo r each attendee with the following:
a. Cover sheet indicating Audio Training
b. Contact information for Audio Contractor and Aud io Consultant c. Table of Contents
d. Printed copy of PowerPoint presentation
e. Copy of Materials List
f. Copy of Loose Equipment Materials List and Produ ct Cut Sheets g. Owners and Instruction Manuals. Make Owners and Instruction manuals available and complete for reference during training.
h. Record Documents Make Record Document available and complete for reference LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 25

during training.
i. Submit training support material binder to AV Co nsultant for approval prior to training sessions
Y. Follow-up training within sixty (60) days shall also be provided.

Z. Single Point of Contact: Contractor shall provid e an English proficient, single point of contact, i.e., Project Manager, to speak for the Contractor and to provide the following functions:

AA. Initiate and coordinate tasks with Owner’s Proj ect Manager, and others as specified by Owner’s Project Manager.

BB. Provide day-to-day direction and on-site superv ision of Contractor personnel.

CC. Ensure conformance with all Contract provisions .

DD. Participate in weekly site project meetings as needed.

EE. This individual shall remain as Project Manager for the duration of the project. The Contractor may change Project Managers only with the Owner’s P roject Manager’s written approval.

FF. Planning meetings and schedule: Within thirty ( 30) calendar days after the date of award of the Contract, an initial planning meeting shall be held with the successful bidder to clarify all requirements (systems, services, distribution methods, etc.), identify responsibilities, and schedule the events that shall transpire during the implementation of the project. Within one (1) week of this initial meeting, the Contractor shall provide a written report and project schedule to clearly document the events and responsibilities associated with the project.

GG. Site Cleaning: Throughout the progress of the plant construction, the Contractor shall keep the working area free from debris of all types and remove from the premises all rubbish resulting from any work done by Contractor. On a daily basis and at the completion of its work, the Contractor shall, to the extent possible, leave the premises in a clean and finished condition.

HH. Safety Requirements: Contractor shall utilize appropriate personnel and display warning signs, signals, flags and/or barricades at the work site to ensure adherence to safety regulations and as prudence requires.

II. Specification/Drawing Status: All specificatio ns and drawings related to this project shall be “frozen” after shop drawing approval. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate any future changes with the Contractor at any time.

JJ. Upon approval of shop drawings, Contractor shal l immediately place orders for all required materials, components, and supplies. In addition, Contractor shall secure and forward written confirmations (including orders and shipping dates) direct from each manufacturer/vendor to the Owner’s Project Manager.

KK. Contractor shall expedite shipment of all mater ials, components and supplies, as necessary to ensure the successful completion of the Project by the date required. All costs for expediting shall be included within Contractor’s pricing as provided below.

LL. The system cost herein shall include administra tion/maintenance training for at least ten Owner’s representatives with a minimum allotment of sixteen (16) hours. Additional hours of training shall be as required at no additional expense to the owner. All training shall include written and/or video materials that shall remain the property of Owner. If materials are written, they shall be provided in quantities sufficient for each person trained; if materials are video, one copy of each shall be required. The administration/maintenance training shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

MM. Review of as-built documentation, including a s ite demonstration.

NN. All warranty information.

3.11 DAMAGES
A. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any and all damages to portions of the building caused by it, its employees or sub-contractors; including but not limited to:

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 26

B. Damage to any portion of the building caused by the movement of tools, materials or equipment.

C. Damage to any component of the construction of s paces.

D. Damage to the electrical, mechanical and/or life safety or other systems caused by inappropriate operation or connections made by the Contractor or other actions of Contractor.

E. Damage to the materials, tools and / or equipmen t of the Owner, its consultants, agents and tenants.

3.12 INSPECTIONS
A. On-going inspections shall be performed during c onstruction by the Owner’s Project Manager.

All work shall be performed in a high-quality manner and the overall appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly. The following points will be examined and must be satisfactorily complied with:

B. Are all cables properly labeled, from end-to-end ?
C. Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications for the specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC and/or DC voltage?
D. Have the pathway guidelines been followed? Are all cable penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code?
E. Has the Contractor avoided excessive cable bendi ng? F. Is Cable fill correct?
G. Are terminations compatible with applications eq uipment? H. Are connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels or faceplates without cables wrapped or twisted?
I. Is the jacket maintained right up to the termina tion? J. Are identification markings uniform, permanent a nd readable?

3.13 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. At the completion of the System, the Contractor shall restore to its former condition, all aspects of the project site and on a daily basis, shall remove all waste and excess materials, rubbish debris, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services provided under this Contract.

All clean up, restoration, and removal noted above shall be by the Contractor and at no cost to Owner. If the Contractor fails in its duties under this paragraph, Owner may upon notice to the Contractor perform the necessary clean up and deduct the costs thereof from any amounts due or to become due to the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove trash from the areas it is working in and bring trash and debris to the Contractor provided dumpster.

B. Final Punch Walk: The Contractor and owner shall complete a final inspection to determinate if all conditions of the scope of work are completed to the owner’s satisfaction. A “punch list” shall be formulated within (2) days of the punch walk and be presented to the Contractor for completion prior to final project sign-off by the owner. If an item is missed during the punch walk or not included on the “punch list” for any reason, it does not release the Contractor from completing the scope of work as defined in the specification or drawings.

C. Contractor shall submit complete Record Document ation as outlined in submittals section prior to project sign-off by owner.

3.14 SYSTEM AND/OR NETWORK TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation, Contractor shal l execute all of the required tests as summarized in this specification. When all such tests have been completed to Owner’s satisfaction and Manufacturer’s specifications, Contractor shall give the Owner written notice thereof.

Audiovisual Systems Specifications 27 41 00 - 27

B. Contractor must assume responsibility of assurin g that the system and network interface installed operates properly, including any required coordination with other suppliers.

3.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The Owner or Owner's representative may visit th e site during the installation of the system to ensure that correct installation practices are being followed.

B. The Owner or Owner's representative will conduct a final job review once the Contractor has finished the job. This review will take place within one week after the Contractor notifies the owner.

C. Two copies of all certification data and drawing s for all identifications shall be provided to the Owner before the owner's review.

D. The Owner or Owner's representative will review the installation and certification data prior to the system acceptance.

F. In the event that repairs or adjustments are nec essary, the Contractor shall make these repairs at his own expense. All repairs shall be completed within 5 days from the time they are discovered.

G. The Contractor shall hand to the owner a copy of any applicable installation specific software configurations in USB format.

EENNDD OOFF SSEECCTTIIOONN 2277 4411 0000
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 1

SECTION 28 10 00

ACCESS CONTROL SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section includes all final d esign, all labor, material, equipment, supplies, labor, testing, and accessories required to furnish and install a complete Access Control/System Alarm System as indicated on the dra wings and as specified herein.

B. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specificati ons, which are presented in a "design-build" format, for the Contractor to design, provide and install a complete, fully operational, and tested system.

C. Miscellaneous system components including, but n ot limited to, cables, termination equipment, punch blocks, patch panels, backboards, hardware, firmware, software, servers, client workstations, monitor workstations, licenses, databases, and any other related items shall be furnished and installed complete under this section, such that the system shall perform all functions listed herein in compliance with all of the specified requirements.

D. Specific Project functionality. Items below may require additional programming and IO modules.

1. Activation of an intercom shall cause the neares t camera (associated with the intercom to record at 30 frames per second (fps) and prominently display on the video monitor at the intercom master station (note there are more than one intercom master stations).

Accelerated frame rate shall continue until motion is no longer detected by the camera.

E. The System shall include, but not limited to, th e following subsystems/products:

1. See Part 2- Products.

1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this section include , but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and sections o f Divisions 1 of these specifications.

B. Applicable portions of Division 26 shall apply t o this Section as though written herein completely.

C. Coordinate with Finish Hardware Contractor to pr ovide and install all Electrified Door Hardware as specified herein. Finish Hardware (door) Contractor shall pre-drill for the listed hardware and certify as required all doors.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall hold a current State of Cal ifornia C10 Low-Voltage licenses, shall have completed at least 20 projects of equal scope, shall have been in business of furnishing and installing systems of this scope and magnitude for at least five years, and capable of being bonded to assure the owner of performance and satisfactory service during the guarantee period.

B. The Contractor shall hold all other licenses req uired by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

C. Contractor shall be a Amag Value Added Reseller (VAR) with the following qualifications.

Documentation of all qualifications below shall be provided with bid:

1. Contractor employs and maintains a minimum of fi ve (5) Amag Certified Professionals and five (5) Amag Certified Associates concentrated in the area of access control. Certified professionals must be staffed in their Southern California Location.

2. Contractor has been a Amag Value Added Reseller (VAR) for the past three (3) consecutive years

3. Three (3) consecutive years as an Amag VAR
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 2

4. Contractor is currently at Amag

5. Contractor must also be a Certified VAR for Gene tec. See CCTV specification for more information.

D. The installing Contractor shall be a factory aut horized distributor and warrantee station for the brand of equipment offered and shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The installing Contractor shall maintain a spare set of all major parts for the system at all times. All circuit boards, amplifiers and control sub systems shall be 100% backed up with stock at Contractor s shop.

E. of the equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Distributor of the equipment. The Contractor shall furnish a letter from the manufacturer of all major equipment, which certifies that the installing Contractor is the Authorized Distributor and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices. The Contractor shall also furnish a written guarantee from the ma nufacturer that they will have a service representative assigned to this area for the life of the equipment F. Communication systems supplied shall be listed b y Underwriter's Laboratories under UL Standard 1459. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the Contractor 's submittal.

G. At the time of Owner Acceptance of the installat ion, all equipment shall include any and all updated software revisions. In addition, when the software is available in disk format, a backup copy of the most up to date revision, in disk format, shall be handed to the Owner at the completion of the project.

H. The Contractor shall pay all charges (including travel, lodging, meals, etc.) required to provide factory certification, equal to that of a Factory Authorized Distributor for two (2) selected Owners representatives. This training shall occur at the primary factory or suitable training site and shall allow the selected Owners representatives to provide any and all Factory/Manufacturer Approved repairs, services, software upgrades, etc. without affecting any available or applicable Manufacturer Warranties.

I. Contractor shall install all access control rela ted hardware including, but not limited, to access panels, reader modules, input ƒ output panels, alarm panels, wireless door receivers and openers, proximity readers, diodes for door supervision, request to exit devices, door contacts, various types of electrified door locking hardware, power supplies, wiring and incidental materials.

1. Door envelopes shall be fully complimented (read er, electronic lock, door position switch, request to exit device and any incidental conduit and mounting hardware) J. The access control system Contractor shall provi de all necessary permits and install all materials and labor in compliance with local codes and UL 294.

1. Applicable doors and frames shall retain fire ra ting K. Power supplies shall be hard wired in conduit on an isolated circuit when possible with a tamper resistant key (blade style) switch.

1. Battery and AC supervision shall be connected to the Amag access panel or reader module to indicate loss of AC power and report low battery conditions

1.04 MISCELLANEOUS:

A. Resistors shall be used at each reader door to e ffect door supervision B. Tamper switches shall be installed and wired at all access panel or reader module enclosures and power supply enclosures
C. Readers, access panels, power supplies and cabli ng shall be labeled to the City's naming convention standards
D. Tests of access control hardware and installatio n shall be performed to the approval of the City's access control
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 3

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In order to maintain a high degree of quality as surance, the Contractor shall, without exception, use the parts and supplies as specified on the drawings and in this specification.

B. For any proposed product substitution or when th e Contractor intends to include an "or equal" product in the bid pricing, provide a substitution request submittal to the Owner's Project Manager for review no later than fifteen (15) calendar days prior to Bid submittal. This report shall include:

1. Description of how the proposed product(s) will impact meeting the project completion date, indicate item(s) with lead times and expected delivery date(s).

2. Itemized cost comparisons between the proposed p roduct(s) and the listed product(s).

3. Detailed technical analysis of the electrical an d mechanical specification differences between the proposed product(s) and the listed product(s).

4. ETL "Verified" or UL "Verified" test lab documen tation for the proposed product(s), component(s) and assemblies.

5. Proposed product identification, manufacturer li terature (specifications and cut sheets).

6. Name, address and contact information of several similar projects where the proposed product(s) have been used.

7. Name, address and contact information of the pro posed product(s) manufacturer's local representative.

8. Sample proposed product(s) manufacturer's warran ty.

C. The Owner's Design Team/Project Manager must app rove any proposed product(s) substitution item in writing. The Owner's Design Team/Project Ma nager reserves the right to require a complete sample of any pro- posed product(s) and may request a sample tested by an independent testing consultant to prove equality. The decision of the Owner's Design Team/Project Manager regarding equality of proposed product(s) items will be final.

D. If a proposed product(s) is given final acceptan ce by the Owner's Project Manager, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner's Design Team/ Project Manager for the costs to review the proposed product(s) substitution(s), and for any additional engineering charges, and shall pay all charges of other trades resulting from this product(s) use, at no cost to the Owner.

E. It is a mandatory requirement that a single Cont ractor perform the work described in this specification.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the date of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Submittal Binder: Submit five (5) copies of the complete Submittal Binder to the Owner for review. The binder shall consist of four major sections with each section separated by index tabs. Each page in the binder shall be numbered sequentially and shall be summarized in the index.
a. The first section shall be the "title sheet" whi ch shall include the submittal date, project title and address, name of the Contractor, and name of the Owner. b. The second section shall contain an index includ ing the page number, product Manufacturer, product part number, product description, and corresponding specification section number or drawing sheet number where that product is referenced.
c. The third section shall contain original manufac turer cut sheets for all of the materials that meet the requirements listed in Section 2 of this specification and all materials described on the construction drawings. Also include manufacturer's cut sheets for all testing equipment to be used for completion of the project. All pages shall be numbered sequentially corresponding to the index. On each cut-sheet, provide an indicating arrow next to each part number of propos ed material.

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 4

d. The fourth section shall contain a Cabling Diagr am. The diagram shall be based on the drawings included in the Construction Documents. It shall be updated to show quantities and part numbers for all components.
e. Failure to comply with any of the requirements l isted above may result in the rejection of the entire submittal package.

1.07 O&M MANUAL
A. Within thirty (30) days of final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of an "Operating and Servicing Manual" for the system. In addition, the Contractor shall provide (1) reproducible copy on the manuals on DVD or flash drive.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. Prior to Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall provide to Owner, a manufacturers product and performance warranty. This will require a submittal of the required pre-job certification registration forms as well as the required project closing information. The Owner will only acknowledge acceptance upon submittal of a valid manufacturer's warranty.

B. The warranty shall commence from the date of fin al written acceptance by the Owner.

C. conditions for obtaining the manufacturer's warr anty shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor .

D. The Contractor shall maintain a competent servic e organization and shall, if requested, submit a service maintenance agreement to the own- er after the end of the guarantee period.

F. Contractor shall follow all manufacture installa tion specifications.

G. Contractor shall provide a project manager to ma nage the entire access control project including, but not limited to, access control hardware, hardware-software programming, wiring, electrified door hardware, electrical, testing and documentation.

H. Contractor shall have advanced Amag software eng ineering resources that can support the CITY all Amag applications. Contractor engineering resources shall be trained and certified in Microsoft SQL database administration and be able t o support the Amag Access Control SQL database.

I. Contractor shall perform final sequence testing of the Amag access control equipment.

Contractor shall repair any failures identified during test- ing. Testing sequences shall include, but is not limited to circuitry, controls, switches, readers, locks, inputsƒoutputs, accurate eventalarms at each door including ‘alarm active', ‘request−to− exit', ‘door held', ‘door forced', ‘access granted', and ‘access denied'. CITY will be pre- sent during all testing sequences to validate accuracy and testing completion.

J. In accordance with City naming conventions, the Contractor shall la- bel all equipment, including, but not limited to enclosures, reader panels, power supplies, wiring, readers, and lock power.

K. Contractor shall wire Amag power fault (FLT) wit h Altronix AC power and battery status monitoring in accordance with the CITY'S Amag wiring standards.

L. Contractor shall maintain organized and document ed cable management within panel enclosures and closets. Enclosure type, enclosure layout de- sign, wire duct, wire ties, and conduit type and locations must be ap- proved by the CITY prior to installation.

M. Contractor shall provide and install conduit to conceal all visible wire. EMT conduit shall be used (no flex conduit).

N. Contractor shall use City approved premium indus trial quality connectors, wire duct, Velcro wire LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 5

ties, industrial terminal blocks for wire splicing and ƒor wire interconnects points.

O. Contractor shall install supervised circuits unl ess otherwise requested by the City.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. The entire system shall be warranted free of mec hanical or electrical defects for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the installation. Any material showing mechanical or electrical defects shall be replaced promptly at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material, Equipment and Software shall be produc ts of a single manufacturer. All material, equipment and software shall be the latest technology and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer' s model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Major hardware components shall be manufactured in the USA us- ing nationally recognized quality processes such as Six Sigma. Acceptable manufacturers include:

1. Aigilon latest version.

2. Contractor shall provide additional licensing or upgrades to City's Amag software as necessary.

B. The equipment shall be available through Authori zed, factory-trained and certified Business Partners or Dealers.

C. Hardware Manufacturer Experience: All system har dware and firmware shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of electronic security management systems and application software for at least 5 years.

D. Software Manufacturer Experience: All system and application software shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of electronic security management systems and application software for at least 5 years.

E. System Installer Experience: The system shall be installed by a factory- trained Contractor who has been regularly engaged in the installation of electronic security management system equipment for at least 5 years.

F. System Component Design: Electronic security man agement system components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic com- ponents shall be of SMT manufactured process. All connections to the intelligent system controllers, intelligent reader controllers, and intelligent control modules shall be protected by SMT type TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressors).

1. Modularity: The Contractor shall provide equipme nt designed for increase of system capability and capacity. System components shall be designed to facilitate easy maintenance and replacement of components and devic es. The system shall auto- configure new and replacement controllers for addre ss, baud rate and communication type. Systems using controller hardware with rotary switches, dipswitches and jumpers for address, baud rate and communication type are not acceptable.

2. Maintainability: Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line supervision capability after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2.02 ALARM MONITORING
A. Alarms Monitored

1. When the SYSTEM is configured, the System Admini strator shall as- sign a default monitor zone to be monitored. The monitor zone shall include default alarm types with default time zones of which the alarm type will be monitored. These monitor zones will then be as- signed to an alarm monitoring client workstation.

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 6

B. Alarm Annunciation Configuration: The System Adm inistrator shall have the capability to configure how the SYSTEM handles the annunciation of alarms on an individual alarm/event basis.

2.03 INTRUSION DETECTION
A. Overview: The Intrusion Detection Management Sys tem (IDMS) shall provide advanced, seamless integration with Intrusion Detection Panels from Bosch (D9412 and D7412), Detection Systems (7400xi and 7400xi 4+), Honeywell (Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, 504, 512), and Guardall (xL, PX, QX, and RX). The IDMS shall a llow CUSTOMER to monitor intrusion detection alarms inside the SYSTEM Alarm Monitoring module, in addition to giving CUSTOMER command and control of supported intrusion detection devices (such as arming and disarming an area). Once alarms are brought into SYSTEM, they shall be linked to digital video, global I/O activity shall be triggered, and they shall be stored in the SYSTEM audit trail.

In addition, System Operators shall monitor the status of intrusion detection devices from the SYSTEM Alarm Monitoring workstation. The SYSTEM sha ll not be the mechanism for initial configuration and setup of Intrusion Detection Devices and basic intrusion detection functionality. All IDMS configuration listed below shall be for used for integration functionality within the SYSTEM.

B. System Administration Integration

1. Intrusion Detection Panels
a. The IDMS shall allow for the configuration of an Intrusion Detection Panel. Each Intrusion Detection Panel shall be given a user defined name for up to 32 characters.

A workstation name shall be assigned to the intrusion detection panel. System Administrators shall have the ability to mark Intrusion Detection Panels as ‘on-line' or ‘off-line' depending on the state of the panels.
b. The following intrusion detection panels shall b e supported:
1) Bosch D9412
2) Bosch D7412
3) Bosch D9412G
4) Bosch D7412G
5) Bosch D9412GV2
6) Bosch D7412GV2
7) Detection Systems DS7400Xi
8) Detection Systems DS7400Xi Version 4+
9) Honeywell Galaxy 8
10) Honeywell Galaxy 18
11) Honeywell Galaxy 60
12) Honeywell Galaxy 128
13) Honeywell Galaxy 500
14) Honeywell Galaxy 504
15) Honeywell Galaxy 512
16) Guardall xL
17) Guardall PX
18) Guardall QX
19) Guardall RX
C. Alarm Monitoring Integration: The SYSTEM shall a llow for annunciation of intrusion detection alarms in the Main Alarm Monitoring Window. Intrusion Detection alarms reporting into the Main Alarm Monitoring Window shall report just like any other access control alarm and shall have the same annunciation and display properties as acc ess control.

D. Command and Control Functionality
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 7

1. Intrusion Panel Commands: A command shall be ava ilable to set the date and time on the intrusion panel. A command shall also be avail- able to read the date and time on the panel.

2. Zone Commands

3. Area Commands:

4. Onboard Relay Commands: A command shall be avail able to activate a relay output. A command shall also be available to deactivate a re- lay output.

5. Off Board Relay Commands

6. Door (Reader) Commands (Galaxy does not support any door com- mands) E. System Events: It shall be possible to display e vents that have occurred on the IDMS panel as well as report any incoming events that occur on the panel while the panel is online.

F. Status Requirements.

2.04 OPEN SUPERVISED READER INTERFACE
A. The SYSTEM shall provide connectivity to proximi ty and smartcard readers which provide continuous supervision and monitoring of reader processor and wiring integrity by means of a non-proprietary communications protocol standard. Supervision methods that simply supervise wiring or measure current draw are not acceptable, since they do not insure that the reader's microprocessor is actually operational. Like- wise, proprietary protocols which are sole sourced or licensed for a fee are not acceptable, since they limit potential future expansion options for the SYSTEM.

B. The preferred protocol is the Open Supervised De vice Protocol (OSDP), since it is non- proprietary and meets the requirements stated above. Alternative supervised reader interface protocols will be considered only if they meet all of the technical requirements of this section AND can be shown to be non-proprietary.

2.05 WORKSTATION & PERIPHERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Servers for Windows 2008/2003 Integrated Systems as required

1. Total security knowledge management system data shall reside on the database server.

Also, all database & query processing shall take place at the server. Intelligent System Controllers can be connected to the database server. The server shall operate on the Windows 2008/2003 Server System platform and uti lize a. Microsoft SQL Server 2005 as the Relational Data base Management System.

2. The Database Server for Windows 2008/2003 Access Control & Alarm Monitoring Systems shall consist of the following minimum spec ifications:
a. PC Specifications (Minimum)
1) Intel Quad Core Xeon E5410, 2.33GHz, 2x6MB L2 Ca che, 1333MHz FSB 2) 2GB 667MHz (2 X 1MB) Single Ranked Fully Buffere d DIMMs 3) 24X IDE CD-RW/DVD ROM Drive
4) Western Digital 73GB 15K RPM Serial-Attach SCSI 3Gbps 2.5-in Hot Plug Hard Drive
5) Dual 10/100/1000 Ethernet Network Ports
6) 17" Flat LCD Monitor
7) 64 MB Dual Monitor Video Card
8) 1 serial port
9) 1 parallel port
10) 6 USB 2.0 ports
11) Speakers
12) USB Keyboard
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 8

13) USB Optical Mouse
14) Surge Suppression Strip
b. Server Software
1) Microsoft Windows 2008/2003 Server System
2) Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Relational Database Ma nagement System 3) SYSTEM Server Software for Windows 2008/2003
B. Client Workstations PC Specifications

1. Client Workstations for Windows 2008/2003 SYSTEM S
a. Client workstations shall be provided for all sy stems requiring additional workstations. The client workstation shall be utilized as a workstation for alarm monitoring, and/or administration, credential management, visitor management, digital video management, and/or asset management c apabilities. Intelligent System Controllers can also be connected to the client workstation provided it is operating on the Windows 2008/2003 System. This client workstation shall operate on the Windows 2008/2003.

2.06 FIELD COMPONENTS
A. Intelligent System Controller (ISC)

1. An Intelligent System Controller (ISC) shall lin k the Total Security Knowledge Management Solutions Software to all other field hard- ware components (Card Readers and Input Control Modules). The ISC shall provide full distributed processing of access control & alarm monitoring operations. Access levels, hardware configurations, and programmed alarm outputs assigned at the administra tion client workstation shall be downloaded to the ISC, which shall store this in- formation and function using its high speed, local 32-bit microprocessor. All access granted/denied decisions must be made at the ISC to provide fast responses to card reader transactions. A fully config- ured ISC with 64 card readers shall require less than one-half (0.5) seconds to grant access to an authorized cardholder or deny access to an unauthorized cardholder.

2. The SYSTEM Access Control Field Hardware shall p rovide a network based ISC. The network ISC shall be a 10/100 MB Ethernet based pan el that has the capability to reside on a local area network (LAN) or wide area network (WAN) without connectivity to a PC serial port. The ISC shall utilize an onboard Ethernet capability deliver this functionality without the need for additional components within the system. Network based Intelligent System Controllers shall be able to communicate back with the database server through industry standard switches and routers and shall not have to be on the same sub- net.

3. The ISC is required to continue to function norm ally (stand-alone) in the event that it loses communication with the SYSTEM software. While in th is off-line state, the ISC is required to make access grant- ed/denied decisions and maintain a log of the events that have occurred. Events shall be stored in local memory, a nd then uploaded automatically to the SYSTEM database after communication has been restored.

4. The ISC shall contain an embedded web server to allow configuration of network and communication parameters. For security, this web server must support SSL communications and allow usernames and passwords to be defined and changed.

5. The ISC must contain the following features:
a. Controller Functionality
1) BACnet protocol support via up to 63 total input s and virtual 2) outputs
3) Support for DHCP and fixed IP addressing
4) DNS device naming through DHCP extended commands
5) 16 MB of available on-board, non-volatile flash memory for 6) badge data, plus dedicated storage for future ap ps and ex- tensions LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 9

7) Battery-backed, non-volatile storage of 50,000 e vents 8) Firmware stored in flash memory, background down load 9) of firmware updates supported
10) Support for up to 16 different formats (8 card formats and 11) 8 asset formats)
12) Biometric template storage support for Bioscryp t® and ANSI/ 13) INCITS 378 templates
14) Advanced anti-passback capabilities
15) Up to 32,000 access level permissions
16) Elevator control support for up to 128 foors
17) Individual extended held open and strike times (ADA re- quired) 18) A dedicated input for cabinet tamper and power failure sta- tus 19) Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit algo rithm for 20) Communications
b. Reader Interface Functionality
1) Support for Data1/Data0, Clock/Data, Unsupervise d F2F and 2) OSDP-compatible RS-485 readers and keypads, incl uding OSDP 3) Secure Channel (SC) encrypted communications
c. Extended Functionality
1) Optional onboard HID® FIPS-201 Embedded Authenti cation B. Input Control Module (ICM)

1. The Input Control Module shall monitor all syste m alarm inputs. a. Grade B Inputs:
1) The Input Control Module shall provide up to 16 UL 1076 Grade B analog unsupervised alarm input zones to monitor and repor t alarm conditions, power faults, and tampers as well as 2 output control relays. When an alarm input is activated, the associated alarm condition shall be reported to both the ISC and subsequently to the SYSTEM alarm monitoring client workstation. 2) Status LEDs shall provide information about the sixteen alarm zone inputs, cabinet tamper, and power fault. For each status LED, a slow flash shall imply a "No Alarm" condition and a fast flash shall indicate an alarm condition. b. Grade A Inputs
1) The Input Control Module shall provide up to 16 UL 1076 Grade A analog supervised alarm input zones to monitor and report line fault conditions (open, short, ground, or circuit fault), alarm conditions, power faults and tampers.

When an alarm input is activated, the associated alarm condition shall be reported to both the ISC and subsequently to the SYSTEM alarm monitoring client workstation.
2) Status LEDs shall provide information about the sixteen alarm zone inputs, cabinet tamper, and power fault. For each status LED, a slow flash shall imply a "No Alarm" condition, a fast flash shall indicate an "Alarm Condition", and a solid LED shall indicate a "Zone Fault" (open, short, ground, or circuit fault). c. Grade AA Inputs:
1) The Input Control Module must provide up to 16 U L 1076 Grade AA alarm input zones to monitor and report line fault conditions, alarm conditions, power faults and tampers. When an alarm input is activated, the associated alarm con- dition shall be reported to the ISC and subsequently to a SYSTEM alarm monitoring client workstation.
2) Status LEDs shall provide information about the sixteen alarm zone inputs, LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 10

cabinet tamper, and power fault. For each status LED, a slow flash shall imply a "No Alarm" condition, a fast flash shall indicate an "Alarm Condition", and a steady LED shall indicate a "Circuit Fault" (open, short, ground).

2. The Input Control Modules must also be able to o perate independently and in conjunction with Output Control Modules (OCM), which will send an output signal to a corresponding output device upon alarm input activation. Once an alarm has been received, the Input Control Module shall activate any or all alarm outputs within the Output Control Module.

The Output Control Module shall provide 16 Form C outputs rated at 5A @ 30VDC. Upon an alarm input from
1) the Input Control Module, the Output Control Mod ule shall transmit an activating signal to a corresponding output device.

3. Up to 32 ICMs shall be connected to an available ISC using RS-485 cabling. Diagnostic LEDs shall indicate ISC communication, input zone s canning, and Input Control Module heartbeat.

4. The ICM must contain the following features:
a. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified
b. Alarm contact status scanning at up to 180 times per second for each zone c. Eight configuration DIP switches to assign unit addresses and communications speed
d. A low power CMOS microprocessor
e. Filtered data for noise rejection to prevent fal se alarms f. Up to 16 Grade B, A, or AA Supervised Inputs in any Combination g. 12 VDC or 24 VDC Input Power
h. 2 Form C Contacts for load switching
i. 2 dedicated inputs for tamper and power status
C. Output Control Module (OCM)

1. The Output Control Module shall incorporate 16 O utput Relays that are capable of controlling a corresponding output device upon any input activation or on command from the SYSTEM.

2. Output relays shall be capable of responding to:
a. Input alarms from a within the same ISC.
b. Commands from a System Operator.
c. Time zone control commands for automatic operati on.

3. Output relays shall be capable of:
a. Pulsing for a predetermined duration. Duration s hall be programmable for each relay individually.
b. "Following" any input point an ICM attached to t he same ISC (on with alarm, off when clear, or as required).
c. Responding on command from the System Operator t o pulse, command on, command off, or reset to normal state.

4. Each OCM shall provide 16 Form C relays rated at 5A @ 30 VDC. The OCM shall control the relays by digital communication. Upon an input from the ICM or command from the System Operator, the ICM shall transmit an activating signal to a corresponding relay. The OCM shall be UL 294 and CE Certified.

D. Dual Reader Interface Module (DRIM)

1. The Dual Reader Interface Module shall provide a n interface be- tween the ISC and card readers. The Dual Reader Interface Module must oper ate with any card reader that produces a standard Wiegand (Data 1/Data 0 or Clock and Data) communication output, anF/2F interface, or that offers supervised communications using Open Supervised Device Protocol (OSDP). As with other card reader types listed above, a single ISC shall LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 11

be able to multi-drop as many as 32 Dual Reader Interface Modules. Each DRI shall support two card readers, each of which shall be up to 500' away from the DRI.

2. Either or both ports on the DRI must support the connection of a biometric fingerprint reader device utilizing server-based templates. The biometric fingerprint reader device can be used in lieu of or in conjunction with a card reader to provide enhanced security and convenience. When a biometric fingerprint reader device is connect- ed to the DRI, the DRI shall provide biometric templates to the de- vice directly from the ISC or IDRC without the requirement for a separate biometric gateway device.

3. The DRI shall monitor door position and request- to-exit device status for each of two doors, and monitor a total of 4 auxiliary alarm inputs per DRI. It shall also control the electric strike for each of two doors and provide a total of four auxiliary relay outputs per DRI.

4. The DRI shall support up to eight unique card fo rmats.

5. The DRI shall support an integrated card reader/ keypad and shall support three access modes upon loss of communication with the ISC; lock ed, unlocked, and facility code.

6. The DRI shall offer the following features:
a. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified
b. 12VDC or 24VDC Input Power
c. Support for up to eight Magnetic and Wiegand Car d formats d. Support for Clock/Data, Data1/Data0 Wiegand, F/2 F, and Open Supervised Device Protocol (OSDP) Communications
e. 2 Programmable Inputs and 2 Programmable Relay O utputs per Reader E. Power Supplies:

1. Power supplies shall be Life Safety Power (LSP) that converts 115VAC, 60Hz input into 12VDC and 24VDC.
a. Specific LSP FlexPower building blocks and enclo sures shall be determined when system is engineered for location. City shall review and approve design before implementation.
b. LifeSafety power supplies must have a NL4 for p ower monitoring. c. 12VDC batteries shall be supplied to meet requir ed back up power time determined by the City's access control (typically 12 hours).
d. A battery Disconnect Module (BDM) must be instal led in each Life Safety Power enclosure. HID reader input voltage condition ranging from 3.8 – 4.1 VDC could permanently corrupt flash memory and make the reader unusable. The BDM prevents this from happening. Life Safety Part# A05-006-BDM. City to provide installation instructions.

2. At LPS power supply installations the Contractor shall program the LSP Panel NL4 network device through the PowerCom – Power System Manager web interface that includes, but is not limited to:
a. Network: The Contractor shall program the NL4 wi th a static IP address provided by the City. Follow LSP NL4 configuration documentation.
b. Time Setting: The Contractor shall program the t ime settings. Follow LSP NP4 configuration documentation.
c. User Setting: The Contractor shall configure a u ser account for the NL4 as specified by the City. Follow LSP NL4 configuration documentation. d. Site ID: The Contractor shall document the site ID or site address as specified by the City.
e. Output Description: The Contractor shall add a d escription for each power output port used during the deployment. The City will provide a description template.

F. Request-to-Exit (REX), Door Position Switch (DPS ), electronic door hard- ware LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 12

1. Each door envelope shall receive a REX, DPS, and electronic door hardware. These items shall be determined specific to each location to match building aesthetics and meet required code(s).

2. REX – Manufacture shall be Kantech, part number T-REX-LT a. Outside of electronic lock part numbers
1) T-REX-LT for standard doors
2) T-REX-LT2 for doors that require 2 relays (local lock release and REX notification)
3) T-REX-XL for doors that require piezoelectric bu zzer 4) Color shall be white unless mounted on area with black background in which color shall be black.
b. Inside of electronic lock part numbers
1) Consult door lock hardware for manufacture part numbers

3. DPS
a. Outside of the electronic lock part numbers: Uni ted Security Products or equivalent shall be used. Exact part number and color shall match door and frame dimensions.

Surface mount DPS shall be used when the installation calls for a surface mount solution.
1) 200SP "Wide Gap - 3/4"" Steel Door Contact -1.0' Gap - CC" 2) 220-SP ""Super Wide Gap - 1" Steel Door Contact - 1.5"" Gap - CC" 3) SP1200 Wide Gap - Miniature Surface Contact with 24"" Wire Leads – CC 4) SP1220 Wide Gap - Miniature Surface Contact with Recessed Wire Terminals - CC
b. Inside of the electronic lock part numbers
1) Consult door lock hardware for manufacture for p art number

4. Electrified Locks
a. Refer to electrified lock hardware schedule
G. Readers: All HID® Signo™ Readers shall accommoda te 13.56MHz for iClass SE and Seos.

1. Model 40 Signo™ singe gang black for wall mount ed applications.

2. Install HID reader spacers every time a reader i s installed on a metal surface to prevent interference.

3. Model 20 Signo™ Reader for mullion mounted appli cations or other applications that cannot accommodate the width of the Model 40.

4. Model 40K Signo™ Reader single gang black with k eypad shall be used where indicated on plans as dual Credential (DC).

5. Model 20K Signo™ Reader mullion mounted applicat ions or other applications that cannot accommodate the width of the Model 40 with keypad shall be used where indicated on plans as dual Credential (DC).

6. Readers shall receive an industrial grade label made by a Roland EGX-30A Desktop Engraver or equivalent engraving system.
a. Engraved material shall be Metal Graph Metallic Finished Acrylic H. Indoor/Outdoor weather of City approved equivale nt.

I. Provide and connect RJ-31X jacks for both access control and security systems and connect to 110 connection block pairs as directed by the Owner.

J. Intrusion alarm keypads shall be Bosch D8229 Acc ess Keypad or ap- proved equal. Keypad shall be vandal resistant and capable of providing a 26-bit Wiegand format output to allow access with a PIN entry instead of a card to obtain access.

K. Glass break sensors shall be model FG-1625/1625T by Honeywell.

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 13

L. Siren for local alarms shall be Sentrol MPI36 or equal.

M. Request-to-exit sensors (as required for exterio r doors without REX integral to lock hardware) shall be Bosch DS160.

N. Panic/Duress buttons shall be HUB2B (DPDT) latch ing button or equal.

O. Door release button shall be Rutherford surface mounted.

P. For parking gate and Sally Port operation provid e

1. Nedap Transit Ultimate long-range vehicle and dr iver identification reader. #9215689.

2. Nedap #9882480 Window Button Switch (qty. as req uired).

3. Nedap to interface with Lenel System for credent ial authorization.

Q. Click-2-Enter device (for Police and Fire contro l of retractable bollards) shall have the following properties:

1. Scanner / receiver radio

2. Variable activation range via programming

3. One or two radio transmission "clicks" for activ ation

4. 50 channel capacity

5. Mutual aid compatible

6. Independent relay control for roll-up doors

7. Bright activation LED and power LED

8. Time/day/agency memory recall

9. CTCSS, PL/DPL private line (PL) programming capa bility

10. Will operate with carrier only for use with dig ital radio systems

11. Uses 12V to 24V DC Power Supplies(Click2Enter-I power will be a regulated 12V DC @ 500mA)

12. Unit enclosed in a NEMA Type 4 box, with securi ty screws supplied

13. Relay or dry contact ready

14. Retrofit kits available for operation beyond te mperature range specifications (hot & cold)

15. Reflective logo for night identification

16. Proprietary programming software built into eac h unit

17. User-selected PIN for security of programmed fr equencies

18. Compatible with analog or digital radio transmi tters, using private line sub-audible transmissions

19. Able to use aircraft AM band frequencies for ai rport access control operations

20. Enhanced user-programmable latch open feature l ets you specify gate open periods from one minute to unlimited

21. Ability to handle high power mobile transmitter s and lower power hand held portable transmitters

22. Able to capture and exhibit activation data log , via software

23. Computer software programmable using standard t erminal emulation software

24. Able to operate in an "on-trunk" mode trunk'ed radio systems (single pulse mode only)

25. Able to use talk around carriers (car to car) o f trunk line radio systems

26. Extra set of relay contacts to activate a multi tude of devices a. Music On Transfer
b. Flexible Mp3-based System
c. Random or Linear Play
d. Volume Control
e. Talk Detection Text-to-Speech (via Festival)
f. Three-way Calling
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 14

g. Time and Date
h. Transcoding
i. Trunking
j. VoIP Gateways
k. Voicemail:
l. Visual Indicator for Message Waiting
m. Stutter Dial tone for Message Waiting
n. Voicemail to email
o. Voicemail Groups
p. Web Voicemail Interface
R. Door Hardware. See Architectural plans and door hardware schedule.

S. Enclosures.

1. New panel enclosures shall be by Life Safety Pow er - LSP.

2. Typical 12-reader / 12-lock enclosure: Power sup ply board 75W, 6A/12V or 3A/24V | Power supply board 150W, 12A/12V or 6A/24V | 16 aux iliary CD outputs class 2 power limited at 2.5A per output | Eight output smart distribution module, class 2 power limited at

2.5A per output | Four port network monitoring modules | Enclosure, (30W x 26H x 4.5D) with Mercury/backplate. PN: FP075/150- 2D8P2MPNL4E8 M

3. Typical 8-reader / 8-lock enclosure: Power suppl y board 150W, 12A/12V or 6A/24V | Secondary voltage power supply, 5-18V adjust- able @ 4A max, class 2 power limited output | Network communication module 2nd Gen. | 8 auxiliary CD class 2 power limited at

2.5A per output | * relay lock control outputs class 2 power limited at 2.5A per output | Enclosure, (20W x 24H x 4.5D) with Mercury/Amag bac kplate. PN: FP)150- B100NL2D8PC8PE4M
T. It is the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard set forth in these specifications and the equipment's technical data sheets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install all access control rela ted hardware including, but not limited, to access panels, reader modules, input/output panels, alarm panels, wireless door receivers and openers, proximity readers, diodes for door supervision, request to exit devices, door contacts, various types of electrified door locking hardware, power supplies, wiring and incidental materials. Door envelopes shall be fully complimented (reader, electronic lock, door position switch, request to exit device and any incidental conduit and mounting hardware) B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary permi ts and install all materials and labor in compliance with local codes and UL 294. Applicable doors and frames shall retain fire rating.

C. Power supplies shall be hard wired in conduit on an isolated circuit when possible with a tamper resistant key (blade style) switch. Battery and AC supervision shall be connected to the Amag access panel or reader mod- ule to indicate loss of AC power and report low battery conditions.

D. Resistors shall be used at each reader door to e ffect door supervision.

E. Tamper switches shall be installed and wired at all access panel or read- er module enclosures and power supply enclosures.

F. Readers, access panels, power supplies and cabli ng shall be labeled to the City's naming convention standards.

G. Tests of access control hardware and installatio n shall be performed to the approval of the City's access control.

H. Contractor shall follow all manufacture installa tion specifications.

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 15

I. Contractor shall provide a project manager to ma nage the entire access control project including, but not limited to, access control hardware, hardware/software programming, wiring, electrified door hardware, electrical, testing and documentation.

J. Contractor shall have advanced Amag software eng ineering resources that can support the City's Amag applications. Contractor engineering resources shall be trained and certified in Microsoft SQL database administration and be able t o support the Amag Access Control SQL database.

K. Contractor shall perform final sequence testing of the Amag access control equipment.

1. forced', ‘access granted', and ‘access denied'. City will be present dur- ing all testing sequences to validate accuracy and testing completion.

L. In accordance with City naming conventions, the Contractor shall la- bel all equipment, including, but not limited to enclosures, reader panels, power supplies, wiring, readers, and lock power.

M. Contractor shall wire Amag power fault (FLT) wit h Altronix or Life Safety Power AC power and battery status monitoring in accordance with the City's Amag wiring standards.

N. Contractor shall maintain organized and document ed cable management within panel enclosures and closets. Enclosure type, enclosure layout de- sign, wire duct, wire ties, and conduit type and locations must be ap- proved by the City prior to installation.

O. Contractor shall provide and install conduit to conceal all visible wire. EMT conduit shall be used (no flex conduit).

P. Contractor shall use City approved premium indus trial quality connectors, wire duct, Velcro wire ties, industrial terminal blocks for wire splicing and/or wire interconnects points.

Q. Contractor shall install supervised circuits unl ess otherwise requested by the City.

R. Contractor will provide 1-year warranty on all A mag materials and labor.

S. The wiring of the system shall be executed in ac cordance with the drawings and the equipment manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Should any variations in these requirements occur, the Contractor shall notify the architect before making any changes. It shall be the responsibility of the factory-authorized distributor of the approved equipment to install the equipment and guarantee the system to operate as per plans and specifications.

T. Furnish all conduit, junction boxes, conductors, equipment plugs, terminal strips, etc., and labor to install a complete and operable system.

U. The cables within the rack or cabinets shall be carefully cabled and laced with Velcro. All cables shall be numbered for identification.

V. Splices of conductors in underground pull boxes are not permitted.

W. The labor employed by the Contractor shall be re gularly employed in the installation and repair of communication systems and shall be acceptable to the owner and architect to engage in the installation and service of this system.

X. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipm ent and materials. All exposed parts of the equipment, cabinets, and other equipment shall be left in a clean condition, unblemished and free of all dirt, dust, smudges, spots, fingerprints, etc., the Contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish occasioned by the electronic systems work from the site. The Con- tractor shall thoroughly clean all buildings of any dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., Caused by the performance of this work.

Y. The system must meet all local and other prevail ing codes.

Z. cabling installations shall be performed by qual ified technicians.

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 16

AA. cabling shall up to 1,000' be splice free. Any cable requiring field splices must be secured in a lockable NEMA4 (indoor), or NEMA 3 (outdoor) enclos ure.

BB. In order to ensure the least amount of cable un twisting, it is required that all cables shall be stripped using a special tool.

CC. The use of lubricants (i.e. Yellow 77) to facil itate the installation of cables in conduits is highly discouraged. If such a lubricant must be used, the Contractor shall verify the acceptability of the lubricant to be used with the cable manufacturer, prior to using such a lubricant.

DD. Under no circumstance are "channel locks" or other pliers to be used.

EE. firewalls penetrated by security cabling shall be sealed by use a non- permanent fire blanket or other method in compliance with the current edition of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and the National Electric Code (NEC) or other prevailing code and must be a system listed by Underwriter's Laboratory (U.L.). The Contractor must not use concrete or other non- removable substance for fire stopping on cable trays, raceways or conduits. Contractor s who use this method will be required to replace all cables affected and provide the original specified access to each effected area.

FF. Equipment racks shall be bolted to the floor by the Contractor once the Owner determines the exact location for each rack. The earthquake mounting brackets that come with each relay rack kit shall be screwed to studs, not drywall. All equipment shall be serviceable in the racks final location – the need to unbolt racking equipment to access or service equipment is not acceptable.

3.02 SPECIFIC SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. The installer shall, upon completion of the syst em installation, adjust all controls, etc., to provide a system operating at maximum capability.

B. Submit block diagram and shop drawing of equipme nt.

C. The system shall be programmed to annunciate, in alphanumeric format, the device type and device location (in room name format) for all alarm, trouble, service, and faulted conditions.

3.03 TESTING
A. General: Provide all instruments for testing and demonstrating in the presence of the owner's inspector that the frequency response is as stat- ed in the factory data sheets. Check all circuits and wiring to verify they are free of shorts and grounds.

3.04 SPECIFIC SYSTEM TESTING AND VERIFICATION
A. System shall be complete and properly operating prior to calling for the test. The inspector, Contractor and engineer shall walk test system at District's option and Contractor shall make minor satisfactory adjustments to the system in the presence of the inspector. Contractor shall coordinate the time of test with the City's inspector. This test shall be performed during a time when there are no other persons on the site.

B. Tests:

1. Notify architect and owners representative in wr iting, in advance of testing, at least ten (10) working days in advance of testing to pre- vent delays in construction schedules.

2. Test all systems and place in proper and specifi ed working order prior to demonstration of the system.

3. Test system grounds to demonstrate that the grou nd resistance does not exceed the requirements of the Transient Voltage Surge Sup- pression (TVSS) or the National Electric Codes (NEC).

4. Perform tests as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the site.

5. Testing shall be in the presence of the owner's representative, Con- tractor , architect, construction manager and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Verification of Performance:

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 17

1. Prior to acceptance of the work, the security sy stem integra- tor/installer shall demonstrate to the owner, Contractor , architect, construction manager, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction, all subsystems, features and functions of the system, and shall instruct the owner in the proper operation and event sequences of the system.

2. Test each system and subsystem. The demonstratio n is to consist of not less than the following:
a. Designate actual location of each component of a system or subsystem and demonstrate its function and its relationship to other components within the system b. Test the system and subsystems operations by act ual Start- Stop/On-Off, Open/Closing, Arming/Disarming cycling, showing how to work controls, how to reset devices and how to conduct emergency operating/oper ations procedures. c. Test communication, signaling and intrusion dete ction equipment/devices by actual operation of such devices.

3. Systems to be tested are to include, but are not limited to the follow- ing:
a. UPS or battery power and distribution system for standby operation during primary power failure
b. Motion detection equipment and access control pa nels c. Door monitoring system
d. Access control system
e. Situation/panic alarms
f. ID Badging system
g. CCTV integration
h. Data Import utility
i. ASCII interface

4. Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perfo rm the testing and provide instructions.

Allow 1 week of time for performing the pre- scribed testing.

5. Arrange with the owners designated representativ e the date and times for performing the testing. The owner will select date and time for demonstration and test.

6. The Contractor and a factory-trained technical r epresentative shall test the completed system for proper operation. Testing of major equipment shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Contractor 's documented, and approved testing procedures. All equipment and power shall be operated and checked to ensure that operation conforms to the Contractor 's elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, and specifications. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all the functions specified.

Any system, equipment or wiring failures discovered during this test shall be re- paired or replaced before scheduling the final test. All failures dis- covered during this test shall be reported to the construction manager/architect in writing. The report shall state the reason for the failure and the corrective action taken.

7. The system shall be tested for final acceptance in the presence of the construction manager's and owner's representative, architect's representative, and Contractor 's representative. The Contractor shall record and submit the test results to the construction manager and owner's representatives.

8. Upon successful completion of all final tests an d before formal system acceptance, the Contractor 's representative and security system integrator/installer shall each author and sign a letter confirming the successful completion of the testing. Two (2) copies of each letter shall be forwarded to the owner's representative and the architect's representative.

One copy of the test date shall be forwarded to the architect's representative.

9. Test equipment: Provide two portable radio trans ceivers to be used when walk testing the security detection system. The transceivers shall be capable of communication throughout the entire site.

3.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Access Control Security Alarm System 28 10 00 - 18

A. The Owner or Owner's representative may visit th e site during the installation of the system to ensure that correct installation practices are being followed.

B. The Owner or Owner's representative will conduct a final job review once the Contractor has finished the job. This review will take place within one week after the Contractor notifies the owner.

C. Two copies of all certification data and drawing s for all identifications shall be provided to the Owner before the owner's review.

D. The Owner or Owner's representative will review the installation and certification data prior to the system acceptance.

E. The Owner or Owner's representative may test som e of the systems features to ensure that the certification data is correct. If a substantial di screpancy is found, the Owner reserves the right to have an independent consultant perform a certification of the entire system. If such a procedure is undertaken, the cost of the testing will be billed back to the Con- tractor.- F. In the event that repairs or adjustments are nec essary, the Contractor shall make these repairs at his own expense. All repairs shall be completed within 10 days from the time they are discovered.

G. The Contractor shall provide not less than three (3) hours for site instruction of personnel in the operation and maintenance of the installed systems. This instruction time shall be divided as directed by the Owner.

H. The Contractor shall hand to the owner a copy of any applicable installation specific software configurations in disk format.

I. The Contractor shall provide formal owner traini ng at the new facility consisting of a one (1) hour class for 15 people. The training shall cover use of security and alarm systems including such items as; alarm zone arming/de-arming, false alarm response procedures, programming, and local alarm sounder silencing.

END OF SECTION 28 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 1

SECTION 28 20 00

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section includes all final d esign, all labor, material, equipment, supplies, labor, testing, and accessories required to furnish and install a complete Closed Circuit Television System as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

C. All miscellaneous system components including, b ut not limited to, cables, termination equipment, punch blocks, patch panels, backboards, and any other related items shall be furnished and installed complete under this section, such that the system shall perform all functions listed herein in compliance with all of the specified requirements.

D. Specific functionality requirements.

1. Provide alternate add pricing for 1-year retenti on for all cameras listed in the camera schedule plus 16 additional cameras not listed in camera schedule: 12 cameras at 1-year retention and 4 cameras at 3-year retention. Base b id shall include storage capacity for 1- year all cameras listed in the camera schedule (see drawing SE3.04). Storage capacity shall be based by the frame rates indicated on camera schedule considering 1080P resolution, encoding H.264, compression 3 and 50% m otion. .

2. Cameras shall be tied into the Access Control / System and Emergency phones. See Access control / Security specification section 281000

3. The Axis System shall be federated to the Axis F ederation system in a remote facility.

E. The CCTV System shall include, but not limited t o, the following subsystems/ products:

1. See Part 2 - Products.

B. Applicable portions of Section 26000 shall apply to this section as though written herein completely.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall hold a valid State of Californi a C-7 Low-Voltage license, shall have completed at least 20 projects of equal scope, shall have been in business of furnishing and installing systems of this scope and magnitude for at least five years, and capable of being bonded to assure the owner of performance and satisfactory se rvice during the guarantee period.

B. Contractor shall hold all other licenses require d by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

C. Work shall be performed under the supervision of a company accredited by the basic equipment manufacturer and such accreditation must be presented.

D. The installing contractor shall be a factory aut horized distributor and warrantee station for the brand of equipment offered (Axis and ) and shall ma intain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The installing contractor shall maintain a spare set of all major parts for the system at all times. All circuit boards, amplifiers and control sub systems shall be 100% backed up wit h stock at contractors shop.

E. All of the equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Distributor of the equipment. The Contractor shall furnish a letter from the manufacturer LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 2

of all major equipment, which certifies that the installing contractor is the Authorized Distributor and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices. The Contractor shall also furnish a written guarantee from the manufacturer that they will have a service representative assigned to this area for the life of the equipment.

F. All communication systems supplied shall be list ed by Underwriter’s Laboratories under UL Standard 1459. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor’s submittal.

G. All of the equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Distributor of the equipment with the most current software package available at the time of installation. At the time of Owner Acceptance of the installation, all equipment shall include any and all updated software revisions. In addition, when the software is available in disk format, a backup copy of the most up to date revision, in disk format, shall be handed to the Owner at the completion of the project.

H. Contractor shall pay all charges (including trav el, lodging, meals, etc.) required to provide factory certification, equal to that of a Factory Authorized Distributor of the substituted item, for two (2) selected Owners representatives. This training shall occur at the primary factory of the substituted item in question and shall allow the selected Owners representatives to provide any and all Factory/Manufacturer Approved repairs, services, software upgrades, etc. without affecting any available or applicable Manufacturer Warranties.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In order to maintain a high degree of quality as surance, the contractor shall, without exception, use the parts and supplies as specified in this specification.

B. For any proposed substitution, a complete descri ptive, technical and cost comparison, and test report package shall be submitted to the Owner for review. Final approval of the substitution item shall be at the option of the Owner, and written notice of the status of the proposed alternative will be supplied to all bidders prior to the final bid date. The Owner or its representative must approve any proposed substitution item in writing. The Owner reserves the right to require a complete sample of any proposed equal item and may, if necessary, request a sample tested by an independent testing consultant to prove equality. The decision of the Owner regarding equality of proposed equal items wi ll be final.

C. It is the intent of these specifications to esta blish a standard of quality for labor and material to be installed. The Base Bid shall include materials as specified - without exception. Proposed substitutions, if approved in writing by the Owner, shall be listed on the bid form in addition to the specified materials.

D. Approved equal status does not imply final accep tance. Final acceptance of a substitution item shall be made by the Owner prior to the award of bid to the successful contractor, after reviewing the bid information.

E. If a substitution item is given final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for any additional engineering charges and shall pay all charges of other trades resulting from the substitution, at no cost to the Owner.

F. If a substitution item is given final acceptance by the Owner, the contractor shall pay all charges (including travel, lodging, meals, etc.) required to provide factory certification, equal to that of a Factory Authorized Distributor of the substituted item, for two (2) selected Owners representatives. This training shall occur at the primary factory of the substituted item in question and shall allow the selected Owners repres entatives to provide any and all Factory/Manufacturer Approved repairs, services, software upgrades, etc. without affecting any available or applicable Manufacturer Warranties.

1.05 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT
A. Submittals shall be presented and formatted per the guidelines in the Division 1 section of this RFP package.

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 3

B. Submittal shall be furnished in an 8 ½" x 11" fo rmat in 3-ring loose-leaf binders. The cover and the title page shall bear the project name, capital project number, specification number, name of contractor and date. The document shall have a table of contents and page numbers on each of the pages including brochures and drawings.

C. Drawings shall be no larger than 34" x 22". Draw ings larger than 8 ½" x 11" shall be folded to 8 ½" x 11" so that the drawing's name and page number are visible and can be unfolded without being removed.

D. Reproduced material shall not be subject to fadi ng by light or heat and shall have high contrast for easy reading.

E. Cut sheets shall represent the latest version, p art number, and revision of the product. Where multiple products or part numbers appear on a page, a bold arrow or circle shall indicate which product or part numbers are to be used as part of the installation. The submittal shall include all descriptive pages associated with the product, not just the page showing the part number.

1.06 PRE INSTALLATION SUBMITTAL
A. Within thirty (30) calendar days after the date of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Submittal Binder: Submit electronic copies of th e complete Submittal Binder to the Owner for review. The binder shall consist of five major sections with each section separated by index tabs. Each page in the binder shall be numbered sequentially and shall be summarized in the index.
a. The first section shall be the "title sheet" whi ch shall include the submittal date, project title and address, name of the contractor, and name of the Owner. b. The second section shall contain proposed materi al list including manufacturer's name, model number and technical data for all equip ment the contractor proposes to install. Items shall be identified by specification section and paragraph number. The technical data shall consist of copies of factory issued catalog sheets or brochures, which give ratings and specifications for the proposed items. Include statement describing exceptions being taken, if any, to the specifications wherein the submitted equipment or design varies from that originally specified. c. The third section shall contain original manufac turer cut sheets for all of the materials that meet the requirements listed in Section 2 of this specification and all materials described on the construction drawings. Also include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all testing equipment to be used for completion of the project. All pages shall be numbered sequentially corresponding to the index.
d. The fourth section shall contain Single line sys tem diagram identifying and showing interrelationships between equipment items and how they are interconnected. The diagram shall be based on the drawings included in the Construction Documents. It shall be updated to show quantities and part numbers for all components including patch panels, cable, conduit, cabinets and equipment racks, splices, splice cases and all other associated components.
e. The fifth section shall contain shop drawings sh owing details of fabricated items, rack elevation drawings, console arrangements and schema tics of custom designed items.
f. For any exceptions that are not approved by City , contractor shall resubmit the information in complete compliance with the specifications and drawings. g. Failure to comply with any of the requirements l isted above may result in the rejection of the entire submittal package.

1.07 POST INSTALLATION SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the comp letion of work, the Con- tractor shall submit the following:

1. Record Documentation:

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 4

a. Record drawings shall be made on separate clean blue line prints of the electrical drawings issued by the City or Architect and shall be reserved for the purpose of showing work as actually installed, including accurately dimensioned locations of all conduit stub-outs and pull boxes, routing of all conduits extending from or between buildings and locations of all telecommunications equipment not installed according to drawings.
b. Drawings shall be kept up to date with neat and legible annotations made thereon daily as work proceeds, showing work as actually installed. Additional sheets may be attached to show greater detail. Drawings shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept on the job at a location designated by the City.

2. Contractor at his option may use an additional s et of drawings for daily field annotations.

This set of drawings shall be kept at the site.

3. Final record drawings shall be submitted with fl oor numbers, room numbers, panel directories and all other identification necessary to conform to number designations for occupancy rather than to construction numbers. All buried conduit and/or underground conduits stubs intended for future extension shall be accurately shown as to depth and exact measurement from a permanently established landmark, such as building or structural features.

4. On completion, record drawings shall be signed, dated and returned to the City for inspection and approval before acceptance of any work.

5. Provide three (3) sets of drawings to Library Ca pital Projects Section and one (1) set to City Telecommunications Systems Engineer.

B. Final Submittal

1. Three (3) complete sets of the Final Submittal i ncluding a full set of the drawings on vellum shall be delivered to the Library Capital Pro- jects Section and two (2) complete sets to the City Telecommunications Systems Enginee r prior to acceptance tests and as a condition for final payment for the project to the contractor. It shall include all the information necessary to maintain each system, and shall consist of the following:
a. Operators Instructions (as applicable).
b. Factory-issued Service Manuals for each piece of equipment installed. The manuals shall contain complete parts lists, detailed schematics, circuit descriptions, maintenance procedures and trouble-shooting methods . In the event such manuals are not available from the factory, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to compile and submit the required information.
c. A System Manual for each system furnished. This manual shall complement the above service manuals with all necessary additional information unique to the system that is not otherwise provided, such as a list of applicable service manuals, options selected, jumper or strapping choices, modifications, and detailed wiring information.

All manuals shall be bound in a 3- ring binder with tabs identifying each system. d. Record Drawings (see Paragraph 1.07-A-5).
e. Two (2) electronic copies of all drawings in Aut oCAD 2000 format or as specified by the City Telecommunications System Engineer, shall be provided. One copy to the Library Capital Project Section and one copy to the City Telecommunications Systems Engineer.

1.08 GENERAL SYSTEM WARRANTY
A. Prior to Owner acceptance, the contractor shall provide to Owner, a manufacturers product and performance warranty. This will require a submittal of the required pre-job certification registration forms as well as the required project closing information. The Owner will only acknowledge acceptance upon submittal of a valid manufacturer’s warranty.

B. The warranty shall commence from the date of fin al written acceptance by the Owner.

C. Conditions for obtaining the manufacturer’s warr anty shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 5

D. Contractor shall maintain a competent service or ganization and shall, if requested, submit a service maintenance agreement to the owner after th e end of the guarantee period.

1.09 SPECIFIC SYSTEM WARRANTY
A. The entire system shall be warranted free of mec hanical or electrical defects for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the installation. Any material showing mechanical or electrical defects shall be replaced promptly at no expense to the Owner. The warranty shall be transferable to any person/persons at the discretion of the Owner PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material, Equipment and Software shall be produc ts of a single manufacturer. All material, equipment and software shall be the latest technology and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer’ s model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Acceptable manufacturers include:

1. Axis or equal
B. The equipment shall be available through Authori zed, factory-trained and certified Business Partners or Dealers.

E. System Installer Experience: The system shall be installed by a factory- trained contractor who has been regularly engaged in the installation of electronic security management system equipment for at least 5 years.

1. Modularity: The contractor shall provide equipme nt designed for in- crease of system capability and capacity. System components shall be designed to facilitate easy maintenance and replacement of com- ponents and dev ices. The system shall auto- configure new and re- placement controllers for address, baud rate and communication type. Systems using controller hardware with rotary switches, dipswitches and jumpers for address, baud rate and communication type are not acceptable.

G. It is the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard set forth in these specifications and the equipment's technical data sheets.

H. The functions and features specified are vital t o the operation of this facility. Therefore, inclusion of a component's manufacturer in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the contractor from strict compliance with the requirements of this specification.

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 6

I. The communication contractor shall furnish and i nstall a Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system. The CCTV system shall consist of fixed cameras, monitors, power supply, cabling, distribution amplifier, and associated equipment. The CCTV System shall be monitored and recorded on the VMS located in the Owner’s Server Room.

J. CCTV Contractor shall furnish and install a comp lete and fully functional CCTV system. CCTV Contractor shall furnish and install any and all ma terials whether or not specified to provide a complete and fully functional CCTV system. CCTV Con tractor shall configure all settings and programming of the equipment including but not limited to camera titles, presets, recording schedules, and frame rates. CCTV Contractor shall co- ordinate with the Owner’s IT Project Manager in the system settings and configuration.

K. CCTV Contractor shall meet or exceed all Federal , State, and local build- ing codes including but not limited to the National Electric Code and Fire Codes. CCTV Contractor shall install all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and specifications. CCTV Contractor shall install all materials in accordance with professional standards including EIA/TIA standards.

L. CCTV Contractor and its subcontractors shall be an authorized manufacturer dealer/reseller and manufacturer’s certified installer of the CCTV system and VMS equipment. The Contractor and subcontractors shall submit manufacturer’s certification documentation at the time of bid submittal.

M. Cabling – CCTV Contractor shall furnish and inst all all cabling for the CCTV system. CCTV Contractor shall furnish and install all cabling supports as per NEC and EIA/TIA requirements.

Cable support shall be independent from ceiling and other equipment supports.

N. Cabling installed in the interior of the buildin g shall be plenum rated. Any cabling installed exterior to the building shall be installed in and protected with weatherproof and watertight conduit and enclosures.

O. Cameras - The camera locations are shown on the plans. CCTV Contractor shall verify camera locations at the site. CCTV Contractor shall furnish and install cameras and mounts. CCTV contractor shall furnish and install appropriate mounting backboxes for the cameras. CCTV con- tractor shall secure and earthquake brace camera backboxes. CCTV con- tractor shall verify which appropriate camera back box to use with the camera manufacturer. CCTV contractor shall cut ceiling tiles in a neat and cl ean manner as necessary to install the camera backboxes and cameras. CCTV contractor shall ensure that no gaps are visible in the ceiling when the cameras are installed. CCTV Contractor shall adjust the camera lenses and settings to obtain the required views. CCTV Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s project manager and end user to determine camera vi ew. CCTV Contractor shall readjust the camera lenses and settings as necessary to obtain a lternate views as requested by Owner’s Project Manager. CCTV Contractor shall connect the cameras to the video inputs of the respective monitor.

P. Camera power supplies – Cameras shall be powered by POE network switches or POE injectors. Exterior camera heaters may require additional AC or DC power. Provide power supplies and cable as required.

Q. Power supplies. All cameras will be PoE.

R. Contractor shall install an IP Video Management System (VMS) consists of software, Patch panels, Category 6 cabling, patch cables, fiber transceivers, servers, disk storage, network switches as required for a complete and operable system.

S. Monitors – CCTV Contractor shall furnish and ins tall two desktop mounted LCD monitors at the circulation desk and one desktop mounted monitor at the reference desk. The circulation desk monitors will display the cameras viewing the public and family restrooms. The reference desk monitor will display the camera view the family restroom.

T. CCTV Contractor shall configure all settings of the CCTV system including all parameters of the cameras and monitors. CCTV Contractor shall coordin ate with the general contractor and

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 7

Owner’s project manager for the installation schedule and to deliver a fully functional system.

U. The installation shall comply with ALL applicabl e National Electric Codes, Building, and Fire Codes. The CCTV Contractor shall apply section 2710 00 – Structured Cabling System (SCS) for all cabling infrastructure associated with the CCTV system.

2.02 VMS
A. Axis High Performance Network Security Appliance

1. OS Windows 10

2. CPU Intel® Zeon® E5-2609v3 1.9GHz

3. Redundant 800W power supply

4. Internal Storage 4x3.5 SATA HDD bays with 8TB HP Helium Drives

5. Video Storage Array:
a. Streamvault 2000E Appliance – 1U 4 Bay , Xeon E3-1270V6, 16GB RAM, (2) 120GB SSD, Windows 2016, (2) 1GbE, Magrox G200 VGA, Dual PS, Avigilon pre-installed.

License sold separately. PN (SV-2000E-R4-D120-170) Qty 2. b. Microsoft SQL Open License 1 Server, 4 CALS. PN (BCD-SQL- OPEN) Qty 2. c. Streamvault Server (e) Accessory – Dual Port 10G Ethernet Adapter SFP+ SR. PN (SV-E-ACC-SRV-10G-EX) Qty 2.
d. SVS-7000 series SAN Headend Controller – 4U 56 B ay, 1G/10G ISCSI SAN 4 SFP+, 560TB RAW, RAID6. PN (SVS-7000-SH-IS- 560T-10 ) Qty 1. e. BCDVideo Start Up Services for the SAN Product. PN (BCD-SN- START-UP) Qty 1.

6. Additional storage required for extended duratio n per scope of work above. Available from BDC Video partner. System shall be configured with appropriate storage for cameras, frame rate, duration, and H.264 compression as defi ned in drawings and specs.

7. Contractor shall provide software licenses to ma nage entities within Axis Plan Manager maps. This includes, but not limited to changing reader modes, managing inputs/outputs states (door releases, devices, alarms etc.) and calling up cameras in Axis based on alarms (see specification 281000 – Access Control). The owner already owns the core integration licenses (Data Conduit LNL-1140 and OnG uard Plugin). The contractor shall provide other licenses as requested in this specification.

B. Remote Access via mobile appliance and Web clien t.

C. General:

1. Shall operate on industry standard Microsoft Win dows.

2. System shall not include any proprietary hardwar e such as video capture or frame grabber cards that may cause System instability. System shall be based on industry standard hardware.

3. All System configurations, changes, setups and o peration shall be available to the System administrator for access and use.

4. System configurations, changes, setups and opera tion shall be password protected.

5. Preference will be given to plug-and-play, and m aintenance free Systems.

2.03 HARDWARE
A. Cameras:

1. Interior – 2MP HD
a. Axis P3245-LV or equal by Avigilon

2. Exterior and Parking Structure – 2MP HD
a. Axis P3245VLEor equal by Avigilon

3. Interior 360 degree view camera
a. Axis M3057-PLVE or equal by Avigilon

4. Exterior 360 degree view camera
a. Axis P3717-PLE or equal by Avigilon

5. Exterior 180 degree view camera
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 8

a. Axis Q3708-PVE or equal by Avigilon
B. Camera Mounting:

1. Camera Mounting Hardware – Ancillary hardware sh all be provided by the contractor, if required, and shall be compatible and comparable in strength to other attached hardware.

Contractor is responsible to securely mount all cameras and camera enclosures with appropriate fasteners required for the mounting surface. Follow all manufacturer recommended installation guidelines. See camera sch edules on plans for desired mount.

2. Pendant mount for exterior pole mounted cameras shall be Pelco IWM-GY or equal. Paint to match pole. See drawings.

3. Camera Mounts and Enclosures – Sony or Pelco. Mo unts and enclosures shall be appropriate for environment where camera is mounted . See drawings.

4. VMS Administration Client (1 required – located in Global Command Center (GSS) coordinate location with Owner’s IT)
a. CPU: Intel® 8th Generation Core i5 (Similar or b etter) b. RAM: Minimum 8GB memory, 512 GB SSD storage.
c. Network: High Speed Ethernet (100 Mbps or higher recommended) d. Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 10 Profess ional (64-bit preferred) e. Graphics Adapter: Adapter: PCI-Express, 128 MB R AM, Direct 3D supported f. 24” flat screen monitor.

5. Client Computer (3 required – location TBD)
a. CPU: Intel® 8th Generation Core i5 (Similar or b etter) b. RAM: Minimum 8GB memory,512 GB SSD storage.
c. Network: High Speed Ethernet (100 Mbps or higher recommended) d. Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 10 Profess ional (64-bit preferred) e. Graphics Adapter: Adapter: PCI-Express, minimum 512 MB RAM, Direct 3D supported
f. 24” flat screen monitor.

C. Cabling:

1. Category 6 cabling system. The following is proj ect approved system. Provide Category 6 cabling system with 20 year Manufacturer’s Warranty per specification section 271000.

Cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC  ) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropria te local codes. All copper cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR (Riser Rated), OSP (Outside Plant) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.

D. Miscellaneous Connectors: As required.

E. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessar y to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The wiring of the system shall be executed in ac cordance with the draw- ings and the equipment manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Should an y variations in these requirements occur, the contractor shall notify the Architect before making any changes. It shall be the responsibility of the factory-authorized distributor of the approved equipment to install the equipment and guarantee the system to operate as per plans and specifications.

B. Furnish all conduit, junction boxes, conductors, equipment plugs, terminal strips, etc., and labor to install a complete and operable system.

C. The cables within the rack or cabinets shall be carefully cabled and laced with Velcro. All cables shall be numbered for identification.

D. Splices of conductors in underground pull boxes are not permitted.

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 9

E. The labor employed by the contractor shall be re gularly employed in the installation and repair of communication systems and shall be acceptable to the owner and architect to engage in the installation and service of this system.

F. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials. All exposed parts of the equipment, cabinets, and other equipment shall be left in a clean condition, unblemished and free of all dirt, dust, smudges, spots, fingerprints, etc., the Contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish occasioned by the electronic systems work from the site. The contractor shall thoroughly clean all buildings of any dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., Caused by the performance of this work.

G. The system must meet all local and other prevail ing codes.

H. All cabling installations shall be performed by qualified technicians.

I. All cabling shall be splice free.

J. In order to ensure the least amount of cable unt wisting, it is required that all cables shall be stripped using a special tool.

K. The use of lubricants (i.e. Yellow 77) to facili tate the installation of ca- bles in conduits is highly discouraged. If such a lubricant must be used, the contractor shall verify the acceptability of the lubricant to be used with the cable manufacturer, prior to using such a lubricant.

L. Under no circumstance are "channel locks" or oth er pliers to be used.

M. Plenum rated cable may be run exposed above ceil ings, provided the cabling is supported independent of other utilities such as conduits, pipes, and the ceiling support systems. The cables shall not be laid directly on the ceiling panels. The use of cable ties shall be done in accordance with the cable manufacturer's requirements. The cable jacket composition must meet local and all other prevailing fire and safety codes.

N. Firewalls penetrated by CCTV contractor shall be sealed by use a non- permanent fire blanket or other method in compliance with the current edition of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and the National Electric Code (NEC) or other prevailing code and must be a system listed by Underwriter’s Laboratory (U.L.). The contractor must not use concrete or other non- removable substance for fire stopping on cable trays, wire ways or conduits. Contractors who use this method will be required to replace all cables affected and provide the original specified access to each effected area.

O. Contractor shall bolt all equipment racks to the floor/wall once the Own- er determines the exact location for each rack. The earthquake mounting brackets that come with each relay rack kit shall be screwed to studs, not drywall. All equipment shall be serviceable in the racks final location the need to unbolt racking equipment to access or service equipment is not acceptable.

P. In suspended ceiling areas and raised floor area s (if shown on drawings) where walker duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle station wiring with approved ties at distances not more than 6’ intervals The cable bundling shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure and framework. Plenum cable will be used in all appropriate areas.

Q. Clearly mark security cable at 10’ intervals wit h color-coded tags to differentiate it from surrounding cables.

R. Cable, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags or other markings. The markings shall clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cablings, wiring and terminals. The wire marking format contained in the shop drawings shall be utilized for all conductors installed on the project. All cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire markers (Brady Type B-321, WMS-#17- 321 or equal). Handwritten tags are not acceptable. All cabinets and panels shall be provided with permanently attached lamicoid labels with 1” h igh white lettering on black background.

Labels must contain the text name and alphanumeric identifier as called out on the single line.

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) 28 20 00 - 10

3.02 SPECIFIC SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. The installer shall, upon completion of the syst em installation, adjust all controls, etc., to provide a system operating at maximum capability.

B. Submit block diagram and shop drawing of equipme nt.

3.03 GENERAL TESTING
A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstr ating in the presence of the owner's inspector that the frequency response is as stated in the fac- tory data sheets. Check all circuits and wiring to verify they are free of shorts and grounds.

3.04 SPECIFIC SYSTEM TESTING
A. System shall be complete and properly operating prior to calling for the test. The inspector, contractor and engineer shall walk test system at Owner’s option and contractor shall make minor satisfactory adjustments to the system in the presence of the inspector. Contractor shall coordinate the time of test with the Owner’s inspector. This test shall be per- formed during a time when there are no other persons on the site. The testing shall include:

1. Demonstrate acceptable picture quality and camer a views on each camera.

2. Demonstrate acceptable picture quality on each v ideo monitor.

3. Demonstrate switching, recording and playback fu nctions of the VMS.

B. Owner or Owner's representative may visit the si te during the installation of the system to ensure that correct installation practices are being followed.

C. Owner or Owner's representative will conduct a f inal job review once the contractor has finished the job. This review will take place within one week after the contractor notifies the owner.

D. Two copies of all certification data and drawing s for all identifications shall be provided to the Owner before the owner's review.

E. Owner or Owner's representative will review the installation and certification data prior to the system acceptance.

F. Owner or Owner's representative may test some of the systems features to ensure that the certification data is correct. If a substantial discrepancy is found, the Owner reserves the right to have an independent consultant perform a certificat ion of the entire system. If such a procedure is undertaken, the cost of the testing will be billed back to the contractor.

G. In the event that repairs or adjustments are nec essary, the contractor shall make these repairs at his own expense. All repairs shall be completed within 10 days from the time they are discovered.

H. Contractor shall provide not less than eight (8) hours for site instruction of personnel in the operation and maintenance of the installed systems. This instruction time shall be divided as directed by the Owner.

I. The contractor shall hand to the owner a copy of any applicable installation specific software configurations in CD format.

END OF SECTION 28 20 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Fire Detection and Alarm - Notifier ONYX (Fire
Command Systems) 28 46 00 - 1
SECTION 28 46 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM - NOTIFIER ONYX (FIRE COMMAND SYSTEMS) PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Alarm Control Panels and Accessory Equipment - Basis of Design: Notifier ONYX Series by Honeywell as indicated under product descriptions below; www.securityandfire.honeywell.com/notifier/en-us/#sle.

B. Source Limitations: Where possible, furnish system components and accessories produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

C. Suppliers:

1. Notifier Basis of Design System: Fire Command Systems, Inc; 7 Eustis Street, Unit B, Saugus, MA 01906; (978) 401-9840; www.firecommandsystems.com.

1.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new fire alarm system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Power Sources:

1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system.

2. Secondary: Storage batteries with capacity to operate system for period specified by NFPA 72.
a. Systems Without Voice (EVACS): 24 hours standby time with 10 minutes of alarm. b. Systems With Voice (EVACS): 24 hours standby time with 15 minutes of alarm.

C. Fire Alarm System Interfaces:

1. Fire alarm system interfaces to be listed to UL 864 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Descriptions below are intended to provide means for interface. Refer to project sequence of operations, narrative, and/or input/output matrix for execution requirements.

3. Provide addressable monitor modules (Notifier Model FMM-1, Model FMM-101, or multi- point module) as indicated or as required for connection to addressable fire alarm control panel. Unless devices are explicitly permitted to be connected together as a zone, provide separate addressable monitoring point(s) for each device in order to be individually identifiable by addressable fire alarm control panel.

4. Provide addressable relay module (Notifier Model FRM-1 or multi-point module) as indicated or as required to perform necessary functions via dry-contact interface. Where load exceeds module contact rating, provide accessory power isolation relays (Notifier Model PR-1) suitable for load as required.

1.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Alarm Control Panels and Accessory Equipment: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 864.

B. Provide cabinets and enclosures as indicated or as required to house system components.

C. Fire Alarm Control Panels:

D. Alarm Communication:

1. Basis of Design Products:

E. Addressable Modules:

1. Provide addressable modules suitable for connection to fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use addressable modules only in clean, dry, indoor, non- hazardous locations.

3. Monitor Modules: Unless devices are explicitly permitted to be connected together as a zone, provide separate addressable monitor module for each conventional dry-contact input device in order to be individually identifiable by addressable fire alarm control panel.

4. Relay Modules: Provide as indicated or as required to perform necessary functions via dry-contact interface. Where load exceeds module contact rating, provide accessory power isolation relays suitable for load as required.

5. Basis of Design Products:
a. Monitor Modules:
1) Notifier Model FMM-1 addressable monitor module; single monitoring point, supervises one Class A or Class B circuit of conventional dry-contact input devices; uses single module address on SLC; mounts to nominal 4 inch square or 2-gang box, includes white finish cover.
2) Notifier Model FDM-1 addressable monitor module; two monitoring points, supervises two Class B circuits of dry-contact input devices; uses two module addresses on SLC; mounts to nominal 4 inch square or 2-gang box, includes white finish cover.
3) Notifier Model FMM-101 addressable monitor module, miniature; single monitoring point, supervises one Class B circuit of conventional dry-contact input devices; suitable for installation within appropriately sized device box behind monitored unit; uses single module address on SLC. b. Relay Modules:
c. Multi-Input/Output Modules:
d. Accessories:

1.04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INITIATING DEVICES
A. General Requirements:

1. Addressable Devices: Individually identifiable by addressable fire alarm control panel; suitable for connection to fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits.

2. Conventional (Non-Addressable) Devices: Provide addressable monitor modules (Notifier Model FMM-1, Model FMM-101, or multi-point module) as indicated or as required for connection to addressable fire alarm control panel. Unless devices are explicitly permitted to be connected together as a zone, provide separate addressable monitoring point for each device in order to be individually identifiable by addressable fire alarm control panel.

3. Provide devices and associated accessories suitable for intended application and location to be installed. Unless otherwise indicated, use addressable devices and addressable monitor modules only in clean, dry, indoor, non-hazardous locations.

4. Surface-Mounted Devices: Provide manufacturer's accessory surface mount backboxes or suitable outlet/device box.

5. Devices for Outdoor and Damp/Wet Locations: Weatherproof, suitable for outdoor use; provide manufacturer's accessory backboxes and/or enclosures in accordance with product listing.

6. Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled as suitable for the classification of the installed location.

1.05 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Notification Appliances - General Requirements:

1. Provide signaling devices listed for fire-protective service and intended operating mode (public or private); suitable for connection to fire alarm control panel notification appliance circuits (NAC).

2. Provide control modules (Notifier Model FCM-1) as indicated or as required for selective control of notification appliances.

3. Provide devices and associated accessories suitable for intended application and location to be installed. Use devices only according to listed mounting (e.g. ceiling, wall).

4. Surface-Mounted Devices: Provide manufacturer's accessory surface mount backboxes or suitable outlet/device box.

5. Devices for Outdoor and Damp/Wet Locations: Weatherproof, suitable for outdoor use; provide manufacturer's accessory backboxes and/or enclosures in accordance with product listing.

6. Device Derating: Account for device derating adjustments in accordance with listing where applicable, including but not limited to the following. a. Where accessory protective guards, enclosures, etc. are utilized. b. Where required by field conditions (e.g. ambient temperature).

B. Basis of Design Products:

END OF SECTION 28 46 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Site Clearing 31 10 00 - 1
SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clearing and grubbing of the site, including the removal of debris, vegetation, foreign objects, concrete slabs and foundations, asphalt paving, portland concrete paving and curbs, site lighting and bases, site walls, area drains and catch basins, unwanted existing underground utilities and drain lines, conduits, trees, and other site construction as indicated and as required for grading the site suitable for constructing the proposed project.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements.

C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

D. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products.

F. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling.

G. Section 02 41 00 - Demolition: Removal of built elements and utilities.

H. Project Geotechnical Report.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill Material: As indicated in the Project Geotechnical Report and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Erect barriers, fences, guard rails, enclosures, and shoring to protect personnel, structures, the public, and site improvements and utilities to be maintained intact.

B. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the Owner.

3.02 SITE CLEARING
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00.

B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with material satisfactory to the geotechnical engineer unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

D. Place fill material in horizontal layers in accordance with the recommendations in the project geotechnical report and compact each layer to a density satisfactory to the geotechnical engineer.

3.03 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths is encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.

Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3.04 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities, utility structures, and associated appurtenances to remain from damage.

C. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative written permission.

D. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.

E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. Remove unwanted existing utilities as indicated or as uncovered by work, and cap in a manner conforming to Code. Determine status of utility lines encountered that are not shown on the Contract Drawings. If abandoned, remove and dispose of in proper manner.

F. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

2. Check with local jurisdiction for any needed inspection permits.

3.05 VEGETATION
A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, trash enclosure area, paving, lawns, and planting beds.

B. Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed.

C. Preservation of existing vegetation: The construction schedule shall consider the amount and duration of soil exposed to erosion by wind, rainfall, and vehicle tracking and seek to minimize disturbed soil during the rainy season. A schedule shall be prepared that shows the sequencing of construction activities with installation of maintenance of soil stabilization and sediment control BMPs.

D. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the limits indicated on drawings.

1. Exception: Specific trees and vegetation indicated on drawings to be removed.

2. Exception: Selective thinning of undergrowth specified elsewhere.

E. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 6 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain:

1. Around trees to remain within vegetation removal limits; locate no closer to tree than at the drip line.

2. Around other vegetation to remain within vegetation removal limits.

3. See Section 01 50 00 for fence construction requirements.

F. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil.

G. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.

1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses.

2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 36 inches.

3. Existing Stumps: Treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 36 inches.

4. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surface neat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians.

H. Dead Wood: Remove all dead trees (standing or down), limbs, and dry brush on entire site; treat as specified for vegetation removed.

I. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner.

3.06 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Demolish and completely remove existing construction as indicated from the site, including subsurface conditions designated to be removed or required to be removed to facilitate the work of the proposed project.

1. Demolish asphalt, concrete, and masonry in small sections. Continuously wet down debris to prevent creation of dust or fire hazard.

2. Fragments: Remove from the site asphalt and concrete fragments exceeding 6 inches in maximum dimension.

3.07 DEBRIS
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION 31 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Grading 31 22 00 - 1
SECTION 31 22 00

GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of topsoil.

B. Rough grading the site for site structures.

C. Finish grading.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing.

B. Project Geotechnical Report.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the Standards Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook); current edition.

B. Perform work in accordance with Project Geotechnical Report.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill Material: As indicated in the Project Geotechnical Report and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

B. Verify the absence of standing or ponding water.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.

C. Protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.

D. Provide temporary means and methods to remove all standing or ponding water from areas prior to grading.

E. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipment and vehicular traffic.

F. Protect trees to remain by providing substantial fencing around entire tree at the outer tips of its branches; no grading is to be performed inside this line.

G. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping.

3.03 ROUGH GRADING
A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials.

1. Remove sod, grass, and any other vegetation before stripping top soil.

2. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

3. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

4. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on drawings.

C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.

D. Do not remove wet subsoil , unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content.

E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

F. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to slope for firm bearing.

G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

H. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack surface water control.

3.04 SOIL REMOVAL
A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.

1. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water and other erosion control measures.
a. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
b. Do not stockpile topsoil within plant protection zones. c. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or resued.

B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.

3.05 FINISH GRADING
A. Before Finish Grading:

1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.

2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products.

C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches.

D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 12 inches.

E. Place topsoil in areas indicated.

F. Place topsoil during dry weather.

G. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

H. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.

I. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

J. Lightly compact placed topsoil.

K. Maintain stability of topsoil during inclement weather. Replace topsoil in areas where surface water has eroded thickness below specifications.

3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot (1-3/16 inches) from required elevation.

B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 0.04 foot (1/2 inch).

3.07 REPAIR AND RESTORATION
A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or replace to original condition.

B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark wounds; if root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Architect as to remedy.

C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of equivalent species and size.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction density testing shall be as described in the Project Geotechnical Report and as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.09 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.

B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

END OF SECTION 31 22 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank

Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Landscape Maintenance 32 01 90 - 1
SECTION 32 01 90

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to maintain landscape in a healthy growing condition and in a neat and attractive appearance throughout the maintenance period.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Division 32 Section Landscape Irrigation
B. Division 32 Section Landscape Work

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Maintenance Contractor shall be experienced in horticulture and landscape maintenance, practices and techniques, and shall provide sufficient number of workers with adequate equipment to perform the work during the maintenance period.

1.04 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Continuously maintain the entire project area during the progress of the work and during the ninety (90) calendar-day maintenance period until final acceptance of the project by the Landscape Architect,

1. Maintenance Period begins following "Final Completion" of the Project and after all punchlist or corrective items have been accepted by the Landscape Architect and owner.

B. Maintenance period shall not start until final completion, when all elements of construction, planting and irrigation for the entire project are in accordance with Plans and Specifications. A prime requirement is that all lawn and landscape areas shall be planted and that all lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings which shall have been mown twice. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect, a written notification shall be issued to establish the effective beginning date of maintenance period.

C. Any day of improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall not be credited as an acceptable maintenance period day. The maintenance period shall be extended on a daily basis if the work is not in accordance to the Plans and Specifications. Project shall not be segmented into maintenance areas or phases, unless authorization of the Landscape Architect is obtained.

D. Maintenance shall continue beyond the ninety (90) day maintenance period, as required, until final acceptance is given by the Landscape Architect.

E. Contractor shall provide protection to the project site during the maintenance period.

F. A phased maintenance period will not be accepted.

1.05 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee: All plant material and other materials installed under the Contract shall be guaranteed against any and all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and/or workmanship or improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Warranty periods are as follows:

1. Trees, vines, and shrubs: One Year

2. Groundcover and Turf: One year.

B. Replacement: Any materials found to be dead, missing, declining or not in a satisfactory or healthy condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Landscape Architect shall be sole judge as to the condition of material. Material to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within five (5) days of written notification by the Landscape Architect or owner. All replacement materials and installations shall comply with the Plans and Specifications. Any plant missing due to suspected theft shall be replaced by the Contractor. If the Contractor suspects that theft may be a problem, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to the owner that security on this site needs to be intensified.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Landscape Maintenance 32 01 90 - 2
C. The Contractor may relieve himself of theft responsibility if after the security notice, with no result, a written notice to the owner shall be given that plant material will not be replaced for theft or vandalism due to lack of site security being maintained. This procedure may take place only during the Landscape Maintenance Period.

1.06 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
A. Normal progress observations shall be requested by the Contractor from the Landscape Architect as per observations listed in specifications Division 32 Section "Landscape Work."

1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT
A. Upon completion of all project work, including maintenance period, the Landscape Architect will, upon proper written request, make an observation to determine final project acceptability.

Provide minimum a 14 business day notice for final observation.

B. Where observed work does not comply with the Plans and Specifications, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance period until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and determined to be acceptable. All replacement materials and installations shall be in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Remove rejected work and materials immediately from project. Prior to the date of final observation, Contractor shall provide the Landscape Architect with all Record Drawings and close out documents in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials used shall either conform to Specifications in other sections or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals used and irrigation scheduled. The amendments listed herein are for Bidding purposes only. The final amendment types and rates shall be determined by the Agronomic Soils Test.

B. Turf maintenance fertilizer: shall be "Best Turf Supreme 16-6-8":

1. 16% nitrogen

2. 6% phosphoric acid

3. 8% potash
C. Slow Release maintenance fertilizer: shall be "Best Superturf 25-5-5 with Polyon" and shall consist of the following percents by weight:

1. 25% nitrogen

2. 5% phosphoric acid

3. 5% potash
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
A. General: Proper maintenance, including watering, weeding, mowing, edging, fertilization, rolling of turf, replacement and infill of mulch replacement of jute mesh, infill of settled areas, repairing and protection shall be required until entire project is finally accepted, but in any event for a period of not less than the specified maintenance period after planting.

B. Watering: Thoroughly water to insure vigorous and healthy growth until work is accepted. Water in a manner to prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities of water. When hand watering use a water wand to break the water force. Supplemental hand water as required to maintain and encourage the proper growth of new and existing plant material.

C. Weeding:

1. Keep plant basins, turf areas and areas between plants free of weeds. Control weeds with pre-emergent herbicides. If weeds develop, use legally approved herbicides and hand remove. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Weeding also shall be included in all paved areas including public or private sidewalks.

2. Hand weed as required in addition to the application of weed control herbicides and pre- emergent to maintain all areas free of weeds including turf species other than the specified species. Periodic or predetermined weeding schedules may not be adequate and should be supplemented.

3. Apply a final application of pre-emergent herbicide at the end of the maintenance period, just prior to final acceptance.

D. Tree basins in turf areas: Remove turf from around each tree to create a 4'- 0" diameter basin depending on tree size.

E. Pruning

1. Trees: Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches; to eliminate narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength; to reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns; to maintain a natural appearance and to balance crown with roots. All trees shall be maintained and pruned in accordance with the accepted practices of the American Society of Consulting Arborists (ASCA). Prune only as directed by the Registered Consulting Arborists and Landscape Architect.

2. Shrubs: Same objectives as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the landscape plans. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches, buds or flush with the trunk. Stubbing and heading shall not be permitted.

3. Only skilled workers shall perform pruning work in accordance with standard horticultural pruning practices. Remove from the project all pruned branches and material. Remove and replace any plant material excessively pruned or malformed resulting from improper pruning practices at no additional costs to the owner.

4. Improperly pruned plant material as determined by the Landscape Architect is to be replaced at no cost to the owner.

F. Staking and Guys: Stakes and guys shall remain in place through the guarantee period and shall be inspected and adjusted to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds. Remove nursery stake from all trees that are staked with lodgepole stakes per specifications. Provide supplemental staking or guying as required during high wind events to prevent damage to trees. Any damaged tree caused by high winds must be replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner.

G. Insect, Animal, Rodent and Disease Control: Maintain proper control with legally approved materials as required as part of the Contract.

H. Protection: The Contractor shall maintain protection of the planted areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.

I. Trash: Remove trash weekly in all planted areas, pedestrian walkways and parking areas.

Maintain all areas free of trash, clippings, and debris at all times.

J. Replacement: As per Guarantee and Replacement Specifications of this Section.

K. Fertilization: Fertilize all planting areas, during and just prior to end of maintenance period with the slow release maintenance fertilizer as indicated in the agronomic soils report.

L. Watering: Planting areas shall be watered at such frequency as weather conditions require to replenish soil moisture below root zone and to establish healthy plant material.

1. Contractor is responsible for water audits and payment of any local penalties by local water districts at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 LAWN AND TURF MAINTENANCE
A. Mowing and Edging

1. Initial mowing of turf will commence when the grass has reached a height of two and one- half (2-1/2) inches. The height of cut will be two (2) inches. After initial establishment maintain Bermuda and creeping grasses at 1½” and fescues or rye grass at 2”. Mowing will be at least every 4-6 days for the second through fifth cuttings, and at least once per week after that for fescue. Bermuda grass is to be mowed minimum twice a week. Bent grass is to be mowed daily. Turf must be well established and free of bare spots and weeds to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect prior to final acceptance.

2. Excess grass clippings shall be picked up and removed from the site and premises. Let turf areas dry out enough so that mower wheels do not skid, tear or mark the lawn. Edges shall be trimmed at 90 degrees to pavement, at least weekly or as needed for neat appearance. Clippings shall be removed from paved and planting areas, etc. and disposed of from the site.

B. Watering: Lawns shall be watered at such frequency as weather conditions require to replenish soil moisture below root zone and to establish healthy strands of grass.

1. Contractor is responsible for water audits and payment of any local penalties by local water districts at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Disease control: Control turf diseases throughout the maintenance period with legally approved fungicides and herbicides. Replace any damaged or infected grass.

D. Weed Control:

1. Control broad leaf weeds with selective, legally approved herbicides throughout maintenance period.

2. A final application of selective herbicide shall be applied at the end of the landscape maintenance period, acceptance, just prior to final acceptance.

3. Hand weed as required in addition to the application of weed control herbicides and pre- emergent to maintain all areas free of weeds including turf species other than the specified species. Periodic or predetermined weeding schedules may not be adequate and should be supplemented.

E. Fertilization:

1. During maintenance period an application of turf maintenance fertilizer, as specified, shall be made at thirty (30) day intervals from the date of maintenance period start at a rate of five (5) pounds per 1,000 square feet, and as required by the agronomic soils report.

2. Final application (just prior to final acceptance) shall be made with the slow-release maintenance fertilizer as required by the agronomic soils report.

3. Replacement: At conclusion of maintenance period a final observation of lawn and turf areas shall be made. Remove diseased areas and unhealthy strands of grass from the site; do not bury into the soil. Replant areas with material and in a manner as specified on the Plans and Specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. All grass is to be fully grown with 100% coverage with a suitable thatch layer prior to turnover and final acceptance.

F. Arborist: Provide a written report and recommendations as required by the landscape architect if any plant material is in the sole opinion of the landscape architect, declining, stressed, infested, or otherwise not growing at the anticipated growth rate. The report is to include Agronomic Soils Test Data and recommendations and be provided at no cost to the owner.

3.03 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. System Observation: The Contractor shall check all systems for proper operation. Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each end of the lateral. All heads are to be adjusted as necessary for unimpeded head to head coverage.

B. Valves: Contractor shall set, and verify that all pressure regulating valves to the operating pressure specified on the drawings.

C. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements. Give the Owner's Representative instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency.

D. If the irrigation system is designed and specified to be operable from a central irrigation computer controller located off site, or a standard controller on site. The contractor shall demonstrate to Landscape Architect, Owner's Representative and future maintenance contractor that the central irrigation system is fully installed and operational from this off site control system as described and specified. Contractor shall make all adjustments as necessary to insure this operation prior to final acceptance.

E. Contractor shall set up and coordinate training for the Maintenance Contractor (Provider) on the irrigation controller, and pump with the manufactures representative. Maintenance period shall not end, and the project will not be accepted until this training has been completed.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Landscape Maintenance 32 01 90 - 5
F. Repairs: Repair all damages to irrigation system at the Contractor's expense. Repairs shall be made within twenty-four (24) hours or sooner to prevent damage to site improvements.

3.04 CLEANING
A. During maintenance work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Haul away and remove all debris from landscape areas, and do not leave any clippings, fertilizer, amendments and / or other material from landscape planting and/or maintenance period.

B. Powerwash all pavement and flatwork as necessary to remove all staining and tire marks on surfaces caused by maintenance or construction vehicles, prior to final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 32 01 90
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 1
SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Preparation of site for base course.

B. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving: Finish and binder asphalt courses.

C. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course.

D. Project Geotechnical Report.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO M 147 - Standard Specification for Materials for Aggregate and Soil–Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses; 2017 (Reapproved 2021).

B. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54- kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop; 2022, with Errata .

C. ASTM C136/C136M - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2019.

D. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012 (Reapproved 2021).

E. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).

F. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)); 2012 (Reapproved 2021).

G. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2015.

H. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2017, with Editorial Revision (2020).

I. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2023.

J. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook); current edition.

K. California State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications (Caltrans); current edition.

L. Project Geotechnical Report.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source, location, and gradation of the material.

C. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used.

D. Compaction Density Test Reports.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Aggregate Storage, General:

1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.

2. Prevent contamination.

3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base: Crushed aggregate base, conforming to Greenbook, Section 200-2.2.

B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA.

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 2
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials.

B. Where aggregate materials are specified using ASTM D2487 classification, testing of samples for compliance will be provided before delivery to site.

C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.

B. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re- compacting.

B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to a total compacted thickness as indicated on plans.

B. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch layers and roller compact to specified density.

C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.

D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.

E. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

G. Apply herbicide per manufacturer requirements.

3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements for general requirements for field inspection and testing.

B. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938.

C. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with AASHTO T 180, ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), or ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor").

D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.

E. Proof roll compacted aggregate at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.

B. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.

END OF SECTION 32 11 23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single course bituminous concrete paving.

B. Double course bituminous concrete paving.

C. Surface sealer.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.

B. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses: Aggregate base course.

C. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving: Concrete substrate.

D. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving: Concrete curbs.

E. Section 321723 - Pavement Markings
F. Project Geotechnical Report.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AI MS-2 - Asphalt Mix Design Methods; 2015.

B. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual; 2008.

C. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction; 2009a.

D. ASTM D3549 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Height of Compacted Asphalt Mixture Specimens (2018).

E. ASTM D2950 Standard Test Method of Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods (2020).

F. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC,Greenbook); current edition.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) and the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans), latest editions and supplements for asphalt paving work.

B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit and rising, or surface is wet or frozen.

B. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 F degrees below bitumen supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Concrete: Greenbook, Section 203-6.

B. Aggregate Base Course: Section 321123.

C. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt.

D. Seal Coat: [per Greenbook, Section 203-9] [<>]

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN
A. Parking lots including drive aisles and parking spaces:

1. Wearing course: III-C3 PG 64-10 per SPPWC Section 203-6.5.

2. Base course: III-B3 PG 64-10 per SPPWC Section 203-6.5.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 2
B. Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:

1. Base Course: 1 inch.

2. Surface Course: 1/2 inch.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test mix design and samples in accordance with Greenbook requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.02 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. See Section 32 11 23.

3.03 PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with SPPWC (Greenbook), Section 302-5.4.

B. Apply tack coat to existing pavement including planed surfaces, between hot mix asphalt layers, and to vertical surfaces of curbs, gutters, construction joints and milled pavements.

3.04 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. Install work in accordance with SPPWC (Greenbook) 302-5.

B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. Place to a maximum thickness per SSPWC 302-5.

D. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

E. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

3.05 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
A. Install work in accordance with SPPWC (Greenbook) 302-5.

B. Place asphalt base course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. No pavement course shall be less than 1 1/2 inches in compacted thickness. If finish pavement thickness is 3 inches or less it shall be laid as single course.

D. No pavement course shall be more than 4 inches in compacted thickness.

E. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.

3.06 SEAL COAT
A. Apply seal coat to asphalt surface course and asphalt curbs in accordance with SPPWC (Greenbook) 203-9.

3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

B. Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch of specified or indicated thickness.

C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for quality control.

B. Provide final surfaces of uniform texture, conforming to required grades and cross sections.

1. Test in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirement for density, thickness, and surface smoothness.
a. Density:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 3
1) Field test density of compacted asphalt surface course shall be determined by a properly calibrated nuclear test gage in accordance with ASTM D2950. b. Thickness:
1) Thickness of compacted paving shall conform to ASTM D3549 based on core test.
2) In-place compacted thicknessess shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the contract drawings. Variation from indicated thicknesses shall not exceed plus-or-minus 1/4-inch.

C. Flood Testing

1. Flood Test: Before acceptance, all pavements in the presence of the project inspector shall be water tested to ensure proper drainage. The contractor shall provide water for this purpose. The flooding shall be conducted with a water tank truck. Depressions where the water ponds to a depth of more than 1/8-inch shall be filled or the slope corrected to provide proper drainage. The edges of the fill shall be feathered and smoothed so that the joint between the fill and the original surface is invisible. No standing water shall remain 1- hour after test.

3.09 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 2 days or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.

END OF SECTION 32 12 16
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 1
SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Driveways.

B. Roadways.

C. Parking lots.

D. Curbs and gutters.

E. Walks.

F. Stairs and ramps.

G. Mow strips.

H. Wheel stops.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications
C. Division 05 Section Pipe and Tube Railings.

D. Division 05 Section Decorative Metal Railings
E. Division 31 Section Earthwork
F. Division 32 Section Architectural Site Concrete
G. Division 32 Section Concrete Paving Joint Sealants
H. Division 32 Section Tube Steel Fences and Gates

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: Fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag, subject to compliance with requirements.

1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Conduct conference at Project site two weeks prior to start of work of this section. Required attendance of all affected installers.

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

2. Concrete mixture design

3. Testing and inspection procedures.

4. Concrete finishes and finishing.

5. Cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures.

6. Curing procedures.

7. Construction joints.

8. Forms and form-removal limitations.

9. Reinforcement accessory installation.

10. Concrete repair procedures.

11. Protection of cast-in-place architectural site concrete.

12. Review special testing and inspection procedures.

13. Placement sequence and schedule.

14. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
c. Concrete paving subcontractor.
d. District's or Client's Representative
e. Architect's Representative
f. Inspector of Record
g. Provide meeting minutes for pre-installation conference

1.05 SUBMITTALS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 2
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Proprietary admixtures, pigments, curing compounds, hardeners, sealers, form-release agents, etc.: Indicate compatibility with other materials used.

2. Stenciling material
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, finish, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

1. Submit full range of manufacturer’s standard and custom range of colors and products for review and selection. Provide custom colors on samples as required. Upon selection of color, submit 12”x12” sample of material in the specified color finish for review by Landscape Architect in addition to the specified mock ups.

2. Stencil Shop Drawing submittal to Architect for approval is required before mock up work for stenciling is to begin.

3. Wheel Stops: 6 - 7 inches wide in cross section; with fasteners.

4. Preformed Traffic-Calming Devices: 6 inches long showing cross section; with fasteners.

C. Design Mixtures: Submit proposed mix designs and test data for each class of concrete and for each method of placement.

1. Prepare mix designs on the basis of field experience (preferred) and/or trial mixes, in compliance with California Building Code (CBC), Section 1905A.3.

2. Prepare mix designs on the basis of field experience (preferred) and/or trial mixes, in compliance with California Building Code (CBC), Section 1905.3.

3. Mix designs shall be prepared, stamped and signed by a structural or civil engineer registered in the State of California.
a. Mix designs shall be reviewed by the Architect (AOR) and Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR).

4. Identify for each mix design submitted the method by which proportions have been selected.
a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f'c calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f'c results.

Provide gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixes. c. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete and percentages. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. e. Indicate water to cement ratio by weight.
f. Measured slump.
g. Measured air content.
h. Provide shrinkage test results.

5. Multiple mix designs or multiple manufacturers shall not be permitted for the same application.

D. Mix designs should contain no fly ash.

E. Submit proposed alternate design mixtures for review by the Architect and SEOR when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

F. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Shop drawings should include details such as reveals, recessed lights, handrails, or other elements requiring steel coordination.

1. Coordinate with and identify the details of the Contract Drawings on the shop drawings.

2. Comply with ACI 315, part B and CRSI requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 3
G. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. Submit dimensioned drawing indicating layout of construction joints, contraction (control) joints, dowelled joints, decorative scoring and placement sequence of concrete, utilizing the architect's plans as a basis of design, to confirm design and show any deviations from the contract documents. Submit layout shop drawings at the time of submitting mix designs.

1. Location of construction joints are subject to approval of the Architect.

2. All form seams are to align with construction joints or reveals.

H. Placement Schedule: Submit concrete placement schedule before start of placement operations. Include locations of all joints including construction joints.

I. Pavement-Marking Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.

J. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer (batch plant) and installer of detectable warnings.

K. Welding Certificates: Submit certifications signed by AWS Certified Welding Inspector of prequalified welding procedures, qualifications of welding procedures unless prequalified, qualifications of welding operators and qualifications of welders.

L. Material Certificates: For the following, submit manufacturer data, test results, and technical information for aggregate, sand and cement, submit ½ cubic foot physical sample. For sealant submit manufacturer color standard and custom palette together with physical samples:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Aggregates and sand.

3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

4. Fiber reinforcement.

5. Admixtures.

6. Curing compounds.

7. Applied finish materials.

8. Bonding agent and epoxy adhesives.

9. Joint fillers.

10. Sealer

11. Sealant.

12. Pigments.

M. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates. Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

N. Detectable Warning Device Warranty: Submit copies of manufacture's five year warranty for each of these products and manufacturer custom and standard color palette.

O. Field quality-control reports.

1. Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each load of concrete delivered to the site. Tickets shall include all information required by the referenced standard.

P. Minutes of pre-installation conference.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with CBC Chapter 19A.

1. Chemical products field-applied to concrete shall comply with the air quality requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with requirements of local, State and other authorities having jurisdiction for work performed within public right-of ways.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with CBC Chapter 19.

C. Chemical products field-applied to concrete shall comply with the air quality requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Industry Standards: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.(Plans and specifications)

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete".

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials".

3. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction".

4. ACI 304R, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete".

5. ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting".

6. ACI 306.1, "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting".

7. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete".

8. ACI 347, "Guide to Formwork for Concrete".

9. ACI SP-66, "ACI Detailing Manual".

10. CRSI, "Manual of Standard Practice".

11. CRSI, "Placing Reinforcing Bars".

F. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of cast-in-place, surface-applied unit-paver-type detectable truncated dome products.

G. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

H. Source Limitations for Concrete Paving: Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete material and concrete mixture from single manufacturer with resources to provide concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. Secure all material required for the duration of the project as needed to ensure consistent quality in appearance.

I. Welding Qualifications: Comply with CBC Chapter 17A.

1. Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" prior to performing any welding.

2. Qualify welding inspection personnel according to AWS QC1, "Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors."
J. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

K. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

L. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

M. Mockups: Before casting concrete paving, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to fully demonstrate typical joints (including expansion and saw cut joints), surface finish, texture, color tolerances, standard of workmanship and completed product. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
a. Paving Modules: Construct at least one 4 ft. x 4 ft. mockup of each color, finish, and mix design of special paving module, including stenciled areas, banding and curbs b. Abrasive-Blast Finishes: Mockups shall clearly demonstrate 3 levels of depth of cut for abrasive-blast finishes for Architect's review.
c. Stairs: Construct minimum 2 risers and treads X 4’ long with nosing grooves and stained color within groves for each color and finish specified. d. Mow Strip: minimum 6’ long for each specified width and color. e. Stenciled Letters or Graphics: minimum 4 letters and one full size graphic for each size, font setting and finish. Mock up to be set on concrete pavement or wall matching conditions of final install.
f. Truncated Domes: minimum 3’X6’ long set in concrete with concrete base and grout.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 5
g. Repairs: In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of tie holes, honeycombing, spalls, surface blemishes, etc. to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.

2. Build mockups full-size, matching site concrete components indicated on the Drawings.

Mock-ups shall be complete in every detail, including joints, reveals, edges, chamfers, etc. Include complex joinery conditions where necessary to integrate to other Project components as indicated including multiple pour conditions. Mockups should be provided for each finish, color, joint, sealant admixture and detail specified.

3. Maintain accurate records of variables associated with each mockup to facilitate the matching of accepted mockups during actual construction.

4. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place concrete paving, finishes, and contraction and expansion joints, as applicable.

5. Mockup Acceptance: Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before casting architectural site concrete and paving.
a. The Architect may reject mockups that, in the Architect's sole judgment, do not demonstrate an acceptable completed product, including, but not limited to, color, joint work, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship b. The Architect may require modifications to mockups to obtain acceptable results. c. The Architect may require modifications to mockup repairs to obtain acceptable results.
d. The Architect may require removal and reconstruction of mockups to obtain acceptable results. Multiple mock ups maybe required.
e. Contractor shall provide additional mockups as required to obtain results acceptable to the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Mockup Disposition: Accepted mockups shall not become part of the completed Project.

Maintain mockup onsite for the duration of construction and until all work has been accepted. Remove and legally dispose mockups after acceptance of final installed work. prior to Project Completion and completely remove and dispose of rejected mockups within 5 days of rejection.. If sufficient permanent concrete paving work has been completed, Contractor may submit a written request to Architect to transfer quality control for concrete paving from the accepted mockups to one or more designated portions of the permanent work.

7. Provide written meeting minutes for each mock up review indicating items reviewed, approvals, rejections, connections, or other action items.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending, damage, and rust.

1. Label bundles with durable identification tags. Maintain reinforcement identification after bundles are broken.

2. Store reinforcement to avoid excessive rusting or fouling with grease, oil, dirt or other bond-weakening contaminants.

3. Avoid damaging applied coatings, if any, on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS
A. Formwork: / Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel- type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth surfaces.

1. Set forms to alignment, grade and required dimensions. Formwork shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch from required vertical positions and 1/4 inch from required horizontal positions. Exposed Surfaces: Provide faced plywood panels complying with, or equivalent to, DOC PS 1, Structural I. Provide minimum 7-ply plywood and provide balance sheets for panels coated one-side only. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Provide Medium-Density Overlay (MDO) panels or high density overlay (HDO) panels, with mill-applied release agent and edge sealant. Provide one of the following panels, or comparable substituted product:
a. Olympic Panel Products, "B-Matte 333 MDO Concrete Form." Overlay Color: Brown. b. Pacific Laminate Products, "ProFace MDO." Overlay Color: Black. c. Sylvan Products, LLC, "Armor Ply MDO" Overlay Color: Brown.

2. Hold forms rigidly in place by stakes, clamps, spreaders, and braces at 3 feet on centers, and where required to ensure rigidity.

3. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

4. Place joint filler or backer rod on vertical surfaces in contact with concrete paving.

5. Benders or thin plank forms may be used on curves, grade changes, or curb returns. Back forms for curb returns may be made of ½-inch thick benders cleated together for full depth of the curb.

6. Keep forms in place until concrete is sufficiently hard to prevent damage to concrete.

7. Reuse of Forms:
a. Do not reuse forms if there is any evidence of surface wear or defect which would impair quality of surface or edge.
b. Thoroughly clean and properly coat forms before reuse. c. Do not use forms from previous projects.

8. Provide new forms specifically purchased for this project. Reuse of forms from past projects or contractors stock will not be accepted.

B. Curved Work: Kerf back of plywood form-facing panels, or use accepted flexible or curved forms for curved work with a radius of 100 feet or less.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Obtain written acceptance of form release agent from integral colored concrete pigment manufacturer.

2. Form-release agents shall be non-staining and can cause no visual effect to the finish.

3. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

F. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars (for Welding): ASTM A 706/A 706M, Grade 60, deformed, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

1. Provide two-component "Speed Dowel System" manufactured by Greenstreak.

H. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 7
I. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

J. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

K. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

L. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.

M. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II/V, Type I/II or Type IV, gray, unless white cement is required to achieve colors indicated.
a. Fly Ash: none accepted.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, complying with building code. Provide aggregates from a single source. All aggregates shall be free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.

1. Comply with CBC section 1903A.3.

2. Comply with CBC section 1903.3.

3. Service Class, based on CBC Figure 1904A.2., "Weathering Probability Map":
a. Negligible: Class 2N.

4. Service Class, based on CBC Figure 1904.2., "Weathering Probability Map":
a. Negligible: Class 2N.

5. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch nominal.
a. Source: Reliance, Vulcan, San Gabriel, or Carrol Canyon b. Hard rock mix; no pea gravel will be accepted.

6. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. a. Source: Reliance, Foster, Corona
b. Color to be white to light no dark material.

C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse aggregate as follows:

1. Aggregate Type, Shape, Color and Source.

2. Aggregate Sizes: [xxx to 1/2 inch] [3/4 to 1 inch] [1/2 to 3/4 inch] [3/8 to 5/8 inch] nominal.

D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

E. Shrinkage-Reducing Admixture: Commercially formulated, shrinkage inhibitor capable of reducing initial shrinkage by 80% and long-term shrinkage by 50%. Provide product suitable for use with either air-entrained or non-air-entrained concrete as appropriate to structural member and project location.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following(as required):
a. Meet ASTM C494 requirements
1) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; EUCON SRA, SRA+. 2) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Eclipse Floor, Eclipse Plus. 3) Sika Corporation; Control 40.

F. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Davis Colors - Hydrotint(Liquid)
b. QC Construction Products - Liquid
c. Scofield, L. M. Company: Chromix - L(Liquid)
d. Solomon Colors, Inc. - ColorFlo(Liquid)

2. Color: As indicated on plans.

2.04 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry or cotton mats.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Provide products with not more than 100g/L volatile organic content.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Confirm.
b. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
c. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound (Colored Concrete): Provide products that are acceptable to concrete color pigment manufacturer complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of sealers with no glossy finish and compatible with specified sealer. Provide products with not more than 100g/L volatile organic content.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Sinak Corporation; The Cure WCE or Lithium Cure 1000. b. L. M. Scofield; Cureseal-W.
c. Butterfield Color; Clear Guard H2O.

F. All curing materials should be dissipating without leaving a shiny, cloudy, or glossy finish.

Curing material does not substitute requirement of a sealer.

2.05 STENCIL MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant paper or reusable plastic stencils, designed for use on plastic concrete.

B. Stencils: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant paper or reusable plastic stencils, designed for use on concrete.

C. Shop drawings for all stencils.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.06 HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor and Horizontal Surface Treatment (Sealer): Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate water-based lithium quartz materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

Materials shall be compatible with concrete admixtures and shall be recommended by manufacturer for intended use. Provide product with 0g/L volatile organic content.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Sinak Corporation; Concrete Sealer HLQ 125.
b. L. M. Scofield; Cureseal-W.
c. Butterfield Color; Clear Guard H2O.
d. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Harden. e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.

2.07 AGGREGATE BASE
A. Granular Fill: Class II crushed aggregate per Section 26 of Cal-Trans standards. Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 9
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5- mm), 20 to 10 / 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 0-5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.08 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers:

1. Ceramar by W.R. Meadows. A closed cell isomeric polymer synthetic foam ASTM D 5249, Type 2 .

2. Deck-O-Foam polyethylene by W.R. Meadows. A closed cell expansion joint fille ASTM D 4819

3. Asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips, ASTM D 1751

4. 1/4" thickness.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-re-emulsifiable. Provide proprietary products composed of latex polymers.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; “Acry-Lok”.
b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; "Daraweld C". c. Larsen Products Corp., "Weld-Crete".

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete, and for anchoring dowels to hardened concrete.

2.09 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS
A. Refer to section 32 17 26 Tactile Warning Surfacing.

2.10 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 5-1/2 to 6 inches high by 7 inches wide by 48 inches long at singles stalls and 72 inches long at shared stalls. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel or rebar, 1/2 inch in diameter, 18-inch minimum length.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. Proportioning:
a. The proportioning of ingredients shall be such that the concrete can be readily worked into forms and around reinforcement under the conditions of placement to be used, without segregation or excessive bleeding.
b. When proportioning by weight of loose, dry material, 94 pounds of cement shall be considered 1 cubic foot.
1) Float/Broom Finish: Coarse aggregate 50 percent-50 percent fine aggregate. 2) Retarder finish: Coarse aggregate 40 percent, fine aggregate 60 percent. 3) Exposed Aggregate Finish: Coarse aggregate 65 percent, fine aggregate 35 percent.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 10
4) Abrasive blast finish: Coarse aggregate 40 percent, fine aggregate 60 percent. c. Total water content shall not exceed 35 gallons per cubic yard of concrete. d. Weighing equipment shall be accurate within 1 pound and shall be adjustable for varying aggregate moisture content.
e. A beam auxiliary shall register any part of the last 100 pounds of each aggregate.

The aggregate hopper shall have a volume adjustment.

3. Prepare compressive strength data for both 7-day and 28-day strengths. a. The 7-day compressive strength shall be at least 60 percent of the required 28- day strength.
b. The 28-day compressive strength shall be as indicated. c. Provide drying shrinkage test data at 28 days, from not less than 3 test specimens.

B. When automatic machine placement is used, prepare and submit design mixtures suitable for use with machine placement, including reduced slump as required. Obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

C. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Typical Compressive Strength (28 Days): Provide the following minimum compressive strength (28 days) for concrete paving unless otherwise indicated: 3000 psi.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50-0.60.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch, unless indicated otherwise. a. Slump Limit (High-Range Water-reducing Admixture): 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch, unless indicated otherwise.

D. Air Content, Exterior Exposed Concrete: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having the following air entrainment for all exposed concrete with a weathering probability of severe or moderate per CBC Figure 1904.2.2/1904A.2.2:

1. Provide air entrainment of 6.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1- inch and 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size, if required unless indicated otherwise.

E. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. Limit total chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.10 percent by weight of concrete when tested per AASHTO T 260 potentiometric titration.

F. Limit "drying shrinkage" after 28 days of curing hardened concrete to 0.045 percent of the original concrete volume.

G. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] [0.30] percent by weight of cement.

H. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures may only be used if they are incorporated into the accepted concrete mix designs. Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

I. Liquid Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with accepted mockup.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M [or ASTM C 1116/C 1116M when fiber reinforcement is used]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg. F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg. F (32 deg. C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

C. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

D. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

E. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added.

F. Integral Colored Concrete Mixes: Add pigments at the concrete batch plant. Minimum batch size shall be three (3) yards. The same brand of cement, source of sand, and water/cement ratio shall be maintained for each load of the same color.

1. Batching Procedure: Before adding color-conditioning admixture, the mixing drum shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted with approximately 40 gallons of the mix water and/or a portion of the aggregates. After cleaning and wetting of the drum, add the specified quantity of admixture correctly packaged for the mix design and batch quantity. Proceed with normal batching of balance of ingredients. After loading is complete, mix at mixing speed for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do not add water after a portion of the load has been discharged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete paving installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.03 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

C. Slope stair and step treads at not less than 1.0 percent and not more than 2.0 percent cross slope to drain.

3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Paving 32 13 13 - 12
D. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.05 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation or expansion joint, and saw cut / contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Isolation (Expansion) Expansion Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint and recess 1 inch from finish surface where no joint sealant is indicated.

3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.

4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.

5. Break steel at expansion joints.

6. Dowels- provide prefabricated ‘speed dowel’ assemblies.

C. Saw Cut (Control) Joints: Form weakened-plane saw cut joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth plus 1/4 inch of the concrete thickness, as follows, and to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Continue steel reinforcement across sawcut joints unless otherwise indicated.

D. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/8-inch radius unless otherwise noted. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other trades as necessary to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, and side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

K. Slip-Form Paving: Use accepted design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

Carlsbad City CouncilSeptember 10, 2024

Carlsbad City Council
September 10, 2024